Oracle X5-2L User manual

Oracle X5-2L User manual
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual
®
Part No: E48333-04
May 2015
Part No: E48333-04
Copyright © 2014, 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except
as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform,
publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered
to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As
such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous
applications, including applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all
appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of
SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered
trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are
not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement
between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content,
products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support
Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
Référence: E48333-04
Copyright © 2014, 2015, Oracle et/ou ses affiliés. Tous droits réservés.
Ce logiciel et la documentation qui l’accompagne sont protégés par les lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ils sont concédés sous licence et soumis à des restrictions d’utilisation et
de divulgation. Sauf stipulation expresse de votre contrat de licence ou de la loi, vous ne pouvez pas copier, reproduire, traduire, diffuser, modifier, breveter, transmettre, distribuer,
exposer, exécuter, publier ou afficher le logiciel, même partiellement, sous quelque forme et par quelque procédé que ce soit. Par ailleurs, il est interdit de procéder à toute ingénierie
inverse du logiciel, de le désassembler ou de le décompiler, excepté à des fins d’interopérabilité avec des logiciels tiers ou tel que prescrit par la loi.
Les informations fournies dans ce document sont susceptibles de modification sans préavis. Par ailleurs, Oracle Corporation ne garantit pas qu’elles soient exemptes d’erreurs et vous
invite, le cas échéant, à lui en faire part par écrit.
Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l’accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logiciel ou l’utilise pour
le compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s’applique:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered
to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As
such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Ce logiciel ou matériel a été développé pour un usage général dans le cadre d’applications de gestion des informations. Ce logiciel ou matériel n’est pas conçu ni n’est destiné
à être utilisé dans des applications à risque, notamment dans des applications pouvant causer des dommages corporels. Si vous utilisez ce logiciel ou matériel dans le cadre d’
applications dangereuses, il est de votre responsabilité de prendre toutes les mesures de secours, de sauvegarde, de redondance et autres mesures nécessaires à son utilisation dans des
conditions optimales de sécurité. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité quant aux dommages causés par l’utilisation de ce logiciel ou matériel pour ce type
d’applications.
Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d’Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés. Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à d’autres propriétaires
qu’Oracle.
Intel et Intel Xeon sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Intel Corporation. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques ou des marques
déposées de SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron, le logo AMD et le logo AMD Opteron sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX est une
marque déposée d’The Open Group.
Ce logiciel ou matériel et la documentation qui l’accompagne peuvent fournir des informations ou des liens donnant accès à des contenus, des produits et des services émanant de
tiers. Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés déclinent toute responsabilité ou garantie expresse quant aux contenus, produits ou services émanant de tiers, sauf mention contraire stipulée
dans un contrat entre vous et Oracle. En aucun cas, Oracle Corporation et ses affiliés ne sauraient être tenus pour responsables des pertes subies, des coûts occasionnés ou des
dommages causés par l’accès à des contenus, produits ou services tiers, ou à leur utilisation, sauf mention contraire stipulée dans un contrat entre vous et Oracle.
Accessibilité de la documentation
Pour plus d’informations sur l’engagement d’Oracle pour l’accessibilité à la documentation, visitez le site Web Oracle Accessibility Program, à l'adresse http://www.oracle.com/
pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Accès au support électronique
Les clients Oracle qui ont souscrit un contrat de support ont accès au support électronique via My Oracle Support. Pour plus d'informations, visitez le site http://www.oracle.com/
pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info ou le site http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs si vous êtes malentendant.
Contents
Using This Documentation ................................................................................ 11
Product Documentation Library ....................................................................... 11
Feedback ...................................................................................................... 11
About the Oracle Server X5-2L .........................................................................
Product Description .......................................................................................
About Controls and Connectors .......................................................................
Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems ........................................
Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems .....................................
Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems ..............................
Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections ..........................................
About System Components .............................................................................
Illustrated Parts Breakdown .....................................................................
Customer-Replaceable Units ....................................................................
Field-Replaceable Units ..........................................................................
13
13
14
14
16
17
18
19
19
21
22
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics .....................................................................
Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware Faults ...........................................
Troubleshooting Server Hardware Faults ...................................................
Troubleshooting and Diagnostic Information ..............................................
Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators .... 30
Troubleshooting System Cooling Issues .....................................................
Troubleshooting Power Issues ..................................................................
Managing Server Hardware Faults Through the Oracle ILOM Fault
Management Shell .................................................................................
Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools .............................................................
Diagnostic Tools ...................................................................................
Diagnostic Tool Documentation ...............................................................
Attaching Devices to the Server .......................................................................
▼ Attach Devices to the Server ..............................................................
25
25
26
29
35
37
39
39
40
41
41
42
5
Contents
6
Rear Panel Connector Locations ..............................................................
Configuring Serial Port Sharing ...............................................................
Server Operating System Names for the NVMe Storage Drives ......................
Ethernet Port Boot Order and Device Naming ............................................
Rear Panel Pinhole Switches ...................................................................
Getting Help .................................................................................................
Contacting Support ................................................................................
Related Information ...............................................................................
Locating the Chassis Serial Number .........................................................
42
44
45
46
47
48
48
49
49
Preparing for Service ........................................................................................
Safety Precautions .........................................................................................
Safety Symbols .............................................................................................
Electrostatic Discharge Safety ..........................................................................
FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update .........................................
Related Information ...............................................................................
Required Tools ..............................................................................................
Preparing the Server for Component Replacement ...............................................
Powering Down the Server .....................................................................
▼ Disconnect Cables From the Server .....................................................
▼ Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position ......................................
▼ Remove the Server From the Rack ......................................................
▼ Take Antistatic Measures ...................................................................
▼ Remove the Server Top Cover ............................................................
▼ Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server ..................................
▼ Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server ......................................
51
51
52
52
53
54
54
54
55
60
61
63
64
64
65
67
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off ...................................
Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU) ...............................................
Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions .........................................................
Storage Drive Failure and RAID ..............................................................
Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage Drive ..............................
Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Solaris ..........
Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Linux ...........
Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive ...........................................
Servicing Fan Modules (CRU) .........................................................................
▼ Remove a Fan Module ......................................................................
▼ Install a Fan Module .........................................................................
Servicing Power Supplies (CRU) .....................................................................
71
71
72
72
73
79
82
86
89
89
92
93
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Contents
▼ Remove a Power Supply ................................................................... 94
▼ Install a Power Supply ...................................................................... 97
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off .............................................
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU) .........................................................................
DIMM and Processor Physical Layout .....................................................
DIMM Population Scenarios ..................................................................
DIMM Population Rules .......................................................................
Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance .................................
Populating DIMMs in Single-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance ........................................................................................
Populating DIMMs in Dual-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance ........................................................................................
DIMM Operating Speeds ......................................................................
DIMM Rank Classification Labels ..........................................................
Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators and the BIOS Isolation of
Faulty DIMMs ....................................................................................
Using the Server Fault Remind Button ....................................................
▼ Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM .................................................
▼ Install a DIMM ..............................................................................
Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU) .........................................................................
PCIe Slot Locations .............................................................................
▼ Remove a PCIe Card ......................................................................
▼ Install a PCIe Card .........................................................................
Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives (CRU) ................................................
Servicing the Oracle System Assistant USB Flash Drive .............................
▼ Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive .................................................
▼ Install an Internal USB Flash Drive ...................................................
Servicing the Battery (CRU) ..........................................................................
▼ Remove the Battery ........................................................................
▼ Install the Battery ...........................................................................
101
101
102
103
104
104
Servicing FRUs ................................................................................................
Servicing Processors (FRU) ...........................................................................
Selecting the Correct Processor Removal and Replacement Tool ...................
▼ Remove a Processor ........................................................................
▼ Install a Processor ..........................................................................
Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU) ............................
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems ................
129
129
130
134
140
146
146
105
106
108
108
108
108
109
113
115
116
117
119
121
122
122
124
126
126
128
7
Contents
8
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems ..................
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems .............
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems ................
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems ......
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems .........
▼ Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives ....
▼ Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives .......
Servicing SAS Cables (FRU) .........................................................................
▼ Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables ...................................................
▼ Install SAS Storage Drive Cables ......................................................
Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU) ......................................................................
Related Information .............................................................................
▼ Remove NVMe Cables ....................................................................
▼ Install NVMe Cables .......................................................................
Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card (FRU) ..............
▼ Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card .............
▼ Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card ...............
Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU) ....................................................................
▼ Remove the DVD Drive ..................................................................
▼ Install the DVD Drive .....................................................................
Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU) .....................................
▼ Remove the Left LED Indicator Module .............................................
▼ Install the Left LED Indicator Module ................................................
▼ Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module ....................................
▼ Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module .......................................
Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU) ....................................................
▼ Remove the Motherboard Assembly ...................................................
▼ Install the Motherboard Assembly .....................................................
149
152
155
158
160
162
165
167
168
171
174
175
175
177
180
180
184
187
188
190
193
193
197
201
205
209
209
219
Returning the Server to Operation ..................................................................
Server Filler Panel Requirements ....................................................................
▼ Remove and Install Filler Panels ...............................................................
▼ Install the Server Top Cover .....................................................................
▼ Install the Fan Assembly Door ..................................................................
▼ Install the Disk Cage Cover .....................................................................
▼ Remove Antistatic Measures .....................................................................
▼ Reinstall the Server in the Rack ................................................................
▼ Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position ............................................
▼ Reconnect Power and Data Cables .............................................................
225
225
226
226
228
229
230
230
231
233
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Contents
▼ Power On the Server ............................................................................... 233
Identifying the Server Ports ............................................................................
Gigabit Ethernet Ports ..................................................................................
Network Management Port ............................................................................
Serial Management Port ................................................................................
Video Connector ..........................................................................................
USB Ports ..................................................................................................
235
235
236
237
239
240
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters ....................................................
Managing the BIOS Configuration ..................................................................
Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility ...................................................................
BIOS Setup Utility Menus ....................................................................
BIOS Key Mappings ............................................................................
▼ Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus .....................................................
▼ Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus ..................................................
Using UEFI ................................................................................................
Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode ............................................
Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot Modes ............................
UEFI Boot Mode Advantages ................................................................
Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards ..................................................
Using BIOS for Resource Allocation ...............................................................
Legacy Option ROM Allocation .............................................................
Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks .................................................................
▼ Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings .................................................
▼ Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode ...................................
▼ Select the Boot Device ....................................................................
▼ Enable or Disable Oracle System Assistant ..........................................
▼ Configure TPM Support ..................................................................
▼ Configure SP Network Settings .........................................................
▼ Configure Option ROM Settings .......................................................
▼ Configure I/O Resource Allocation ....................................................
▼ Exit BIOS Setup Utility ...................................................................
241
241
242
242
243
243
245
246
246
247
247
248
248
249
250
250
251
252
254
256
259
262
265
266
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options ....................................................................
BIOS Main Menu Selections .........................................................................
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections ...................................................................
BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration Options .............................
BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management Configuration Options ........
269
269
273
274
274
9
Contents
BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration Option ................................
BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports Options ...............................................
BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console Redirection Options ...................
BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options ...................................
BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options .........................................
BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration Options ......................
BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration Options ..................................
BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options ...................................
BIOS IO Menu Selections .............................................................................
BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options .......................................
BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options ................................................
BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options ...........................................
BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options .................................................
BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options .....................................................
BIOS Boot Menu Selections ..........................................................................
BIOS Exit Menu Selections ...........................................................................
275
276
276
278
279
279
282
284
285
286
287
287
288
288
289
290
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages ..............................
Monitoring Component Health and Faults Using Oracle ILOM ............................
Monitoring System Components .....................................................................
System Chassis Components ..................................................................
Cooling Unit Components .....................................................................
Disk Backplane Components .................................................................
Memory Device Components .................................................................
Power Unit Components .......................................................................
Processor Components ..........................................................................
System Board Components ....................................................................
System Firmware Components ...............................................................
Hard Disk Drive Components ................................................................
Identifying SNMP Trap Messages ..................................................................
Environmental Events ...................................................................................
Hard Disk Drive Events ................................................................................
Power Events ..............................................................................................
Fan Events .................................................................................................
Memory Events ...........................................................................................
Entity Presence Events .................................................................................
Physical Security Events ...............................................................................
293
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
307
307
311
312
318
318
Index ................................................................................................................ 319
10
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Using This Documentation
■
■
■
Overview – This service manual explains how to remove and replace parts in the Oracle
Server X5-2L, and how to maintain and troubleshoot the system.
Audience – This guide is intended for trained technicians and authorized service personnel
who have been instructed on the hazards within the equipment and qualified to remove and
replace hardware.
Required knowledge – Advanced experience troubleshooting and replacing hardware.
Product Documentation Library
Documentation and resources for this product and related products are available at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/X5-2L/docs.
Feedback
Provide feedback about this documentation at http://www.oracle.com/goto/docfeedback.
Using This Documentation
11
12
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
These sections describe the controls, connectors, LEDs, system components, and replaceable
components of the server.
Note - Always update the server with the latest firmware, drivers, and other hardware-related
software by downloading the latest software release package when you first receive the server,
and for every new software release. For information about the software release packages and
how to download the software, refer to “Getting Server Firmware and Software Updates” in
“Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
Description
Links
Review the product description.
“Product Description” on page 13
Review the controls and connectors on the server.
“About Controls and Connectors” on page 14
Review system components.
“About System Components” on page 19
Product Description
The Oracle Server X5-2L is an enterprise-class, two rack unit (2U) server. It supports the
following components:
■
Up to two Intel processors. Processors with the following capabilities are supported:
18-core, 2.3 GHz, 145W processors
12-core, 2.6 GHz, 135W processors
■ 10-core, 2.6 GHz, 105W processors
■ 8-core, 2.4 GHz, 85W processors
Up to 12 DIMMs per processor for a maximum of 24 DDR4 DIMMs and a maximum of
768 GB of memory are supported in dual-processor systems. A maximum of 12 DDR4
DIMMs and a maximum of 384 GB of memory are supported in single-processor systems.
RDIMMs (8 GB and 16 GB) and LRDIMMs (32 GB) are supported.
Six PCIe Gen3 slots in the dual-processor systems. PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional
in single-processor systems.
Storage drive configurations can comprise both hard disk drives (HDDs) or solid state disk
drives (SSDs). Configurations include:
■
■
■
■
■
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
13
About Controls and Connectors
Up to twelve 3.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs
■ Up to twenty-four 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs or SSDs, with optional support for
up to four PCIe-based NVMe SSDs
■ Up to eight 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs or SSDs, with optional support for a
SATA DVD and up to four PCIe-based NVMe SSDs
■ (Optional) Up to two rear-mounted 2.5-inch SAS storage drives in the twelve 3.5-inch
storage drive and twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drive configurations
Two hot-pluggable, redundant 1000W power supplies.
An on-board Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM) service processor (SP)
based on the Emulex Pilot 3 chip.
The optional Oracle System Assistant server setup tool, which is embedded on a preinstalled
USB flash drive.
■
■
■
■
About Controls and Connectors
The following sections describe the controls, indicators, connectors, and drives located on the
front and rear panels.
■
■
■
“Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 16
“Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 17
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
Related Information
■
■
■
“About System Components” on page 19
“Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 19
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems
Note - Systems with eight drives can contain an optional DVD drive. Systems with twelve
drives and twenty-four drives do not contain a DVD drive.
14
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
About Controls and Connectors
FIGURE 1
Front Panel With Eight 2.5-Inch Drives and DVD Configuration
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Locator LED/Locator button: white
Service Required LED: amber
Power/OK LED: green
Power button
SP OK LED: green
Product Serial Number (PSN) and Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) label
Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 0)
Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 1)
Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 2)
Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 3)
Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
Optional SATA DVD drive
Top Fan Fault LED: amber
Power Supply (PS) Fault LED: amber
System Over Temperature Warning LED: amber
USB 2.0 connectors (2)
Related Information
■
■
“Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 16
“Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 17
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
15
About Controls and Connectors
■
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems
FIGURE 2
Front Panel With Twelve 3.5-Inch Drives Configuration
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
16
Locator LED/Locator button: white
Service Required LED: amber
Power/OK LED: green
Power button
SP OK LED: green
Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 8 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 9 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 10 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 11 (HDD/SSD)
Top Fan Fault LED: amber; Power Supply (PS) Fault LED: amber; System Over Temperature Warning LED:
amber
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
About Controls and Connectors
19
USB 2.0 connectors (2)
Related Information
■
■
■
“Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems” on page 14
“Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 17
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive
Systems
FIGURE 3
Front Panel With Twenty-Four 2.5-Inch Drives Configuration
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Locator LED/Locator button: white
Service Required LED: amber
Power/OK LED: green
Power button
SP OK LED: green
Storage drives 0 through 11 (HDD/SSD; Storage drives 3 and 4: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
Storage drives 12 through 23 (HDD/SSD; Storage drives 19 and 20: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
Top Fan Fault LED: amber; Power Supply (PS) Fault LED: amber; System Over Temperature Warning LED:
amber
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
17
About Controls and Connectors
9
USB 2.0 connectors (2)
Related Information
■
■
■
“Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems” on page 14
“Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 16
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections
Note - Systems that are configured with twelve and twenty-four front panel storage drives also
contain two rear-mounted storage drives. Systems that are configured with eight front panel
storage drives do not contain rear-mounted storage drives.
FIGURE 4
Rear Panel Components With Storage Drives Configuration
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
Rear storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
Rear storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
Power supply unit 0 (PS0)
Power supply unit 1 (PS1)
PCIe slot 1 (Nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
PCIe slot 2 (Nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
PCIe slot 3 (Nonfunctional in single-processor systems. This slot is the default slot for the optional Oracle PCIe
Switch Controller Card.)
Network (NET) 100/1000/10000 ports (NET3–NET0) (NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-processor
systems.)
System status LEDs: Locator/Button: white; Service Required: amber; Power/OK: green
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
About System Components
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Serial management (SER MGT)/RJ-45 serial port
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) service processor (SP) network management 10/100/1000BASET port (NET MGT)
USB 2.0 ports (2)
DB-15 video connector
PCIe slot 4
PCIe slot 5
PCIe slot 6 (This slot is the default slot for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA.)
Note - For more information on rear panel components and connections, refer to “Rear Panel
Connector Locations” on page 42. See also “Rear Panel Pinhole Switches” on page 47.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
“Identifying the Server Ports”
About System Components
These sections describe the components of the server:
■
■
■
“Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 19
“Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 21
“Field-Replaceable Units” on page 22
Related Information
■
■
■
“Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing FRUs”
Illustrated Parts Breakdown
The following figure identifies the major components of the server.
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
19
About System Components
FIGURE 5
System Components
Figure Description
Legend
20
1a
Twelve 3.5-inch storage drives
1b
Twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives
1c
Eight 2.5-inch storage drives
2a
Front disk backplane for twelve 3.5-inch drives
2b
Front disk backplane for twenty-four 2.5-inch drives
2c
Front disk backplane for eight 2.5-inch drives
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
About System Components
Figure Description
Legend
3
Left LED indicator module
4
System chassis
5
Motherboard assembly
6
System battery
7
Fan modules
8
Processors and heatsinks (Single-processor systems contain only a single processor in socket P0; socket P1
contains a cover to protect processor socket pins.)
9
DIMMs (Only twelve DIMMs are supported in single-processor systems and the DIMMs must be installed
in P0 DIMM sockets.)
10
Air baffle
11
Top cover
12
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA and super capacitor
13
PCIe cards (PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
14
I/O and internal USB card
15
Internal USB drive
16
Rear-mounted storage drives
17
Rear storage drive backplane
18
Power supplies
19
Right LED indicator module
20
DVD drive (optional)
Customer-Replaceable Units
The following table lists the customer-replaceable units (CRUs) in the server and directs you to
the replacement instructions.
CRU
Description
Replacement Instructions
Battery
Lithium coin-cell battery that powers the CMOS BIOS
and real-time clock.
“Servicing the Battery (CRU)” on page 126
DIMMs
Add or replace memory modules in the system.
“Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 101
Storage drives
Storage drive configurations can comprise both hard
disk drives (HDDs) or solid state disk drives (SSDs).
Configurations include:
“Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives
(CRU)” on page 71
■ Up to twelve 3.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs
■ Up to twenty-four 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS
HDDs or SSDs, with optional support for up to four
PCIe-based NVMe SSDs
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
21
About System Components
CRU
Description
Replacement Instructions
■ Up to eight 2.5-inch hot-pluggable SAS HDDs or
SSDs, with optional support for up to four PCIebased NVMe SSDs
Fan modules
Four fan modules for cooling the server components.
“Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)” on page 89
PCIe cards
Optional add-on cards that can expand the functionality
of the server.
“Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)” on page 115
Power supply unit
(PSU)
Two fully redundant AC-powered power supplies.
“Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)” on page 93
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Field-Replaceable Units” on page 22
“Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 19
“Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off”
Field-Replaceable Units
The following table lists the field-replaceable units (FRUs) in the server and directs you to the
replacement instructions.
FRU
Description
Replacement Instructions
Processor and
heatsink
The processor that carries out the instructions of the
system.
“Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 129
Disk backplanes
Provide power and communications connectors for
storage drives.
“Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes
(FRU)” on page 146
SAS cables
Provide signals between the front disk backplane and
the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA,
and from the front disk backplane to the rear disk
backplane.
“Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 167
NVMe cables
Provide signals between the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch
card and the disk backplane.
“Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 174
Oracle Storage 12
Gb/s SAS PCIe
RAID HBA
Located in PCIe slot 6, the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS
PCIe RAID HBA manages SAS storage drives.
“Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA Card (FRU)” on page 180
DVD drive
Optional DVD drive on configurations with eight 2.5inch drives.
“Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)” on page 187
Front LED/USB
indicator modules
Contain the push-button circuitry and LEDs that are
displayed on the bezel of the chassis.
“Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules
(FRU)” on page 193
Motherboard
assembly
Provides connectors for the DIMMs, processors, PCIe
risers, and other components.
“Servicing the Motherboard Assembly
(FRU)” on page 209
22
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
About System Components
Related Information
■
■
■
“Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 21
“Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 19
“Servicing FRUs”
About the Oracle Server X5-2L
23
24
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
This section includes information about troubleshooting hardware component faults for the
Oracle Server X5-2L. It contains the following topics.
Description
Link
Maintenance-related information and procedures that you
can use to troubleshoot and repair server hardware issues.
“Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware
Faults” on page 25
Information about software and firmware diagnostic
tools that you can use to isolate problems, monitor the
server, and exercise the server subsystems.
“Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools” on page 39
Information about attaching devices to the server to
perform troubleshooting.
“Attaching Devices to the Server” on page 41
Information about contacting Oracle support.
“Getting Help” on page 48
Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware Faults
This section contains maintenance-related information and procedures that you can use to
troubleshoot and repair server hardware issues. The following topics are covered.
Description
Section Links
Troubleshooting overview information and procedure.
“Troubleshooting Server Hardware
Faults” on page 26
Resources for troubleshooting and diagnostic
information.
“Troubleshooting and Diagnostic
Information” on page 29
Discerning the server state using the front and rear panel
indicators.
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel
Status Indicators ” on page 30
Causes, actions, and preventative measures for problems
related to the cooling subsystem.
“Troubleshooting System Cooling
Issues” on page 35
Causes, actions, and preventative measures for problems
related to the power subsystem.
“Troubleshooting Power Issues” on page 37
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
25
Troubleshooting Server Component Hardware Faults
Troubleshooting Server Hardware Faults
When a server hardware fault event occurs the system lights the Service Required LED and
captures the event in the system event log (SEL). If you have set up notifications through
Oracle ILOM, you also receive an alert through the notification method you chose. When you
become aware of a hardware fault, you should address it immediately.
To investigate a hardware fault, see the following:
■
■
“Basic Troubleshooting Process” on page 26
“Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 27
Basic Troubleshooting Process
Use the following process to address a hardware fault (for the step-by-step procedure, see
“Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 27).
1. Identify the server subsystem containing the fault.
You can use Oracle ILOM to identify the failed component.
2. Review the Oracle Server X5-2L Product Notes.
The product notes contain up-to-date information about the server, including hardwarerelated issues.
3. Prepare the server for service using Oracle ILOM.
If you have determined that the hardware fault requires service (physical access to the
server), use Oracle ILOM to take the server offline, activate the Locate LED, and power off
the server.
4. Prepare the service work space.
Before servicing the server, prepare the work space, ensuring ESD protection for the server
and components.
See “Preparing for Service”.
5. Service components.
To service the components, see the removal, installation, and replacement procedures in this
document.
Note - A component designated as a field-replaceable unit (FRU) must be replaced by
Oracle Service personnel. Contact Oracle Service.
6. Clear the fault in Oracle ILOM.
Depending on the component, you might need to clear the fault in Oracle ILOM. Generally,
components that have a FRU ID clear the fault automatically.
26
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Related Information
■
See “Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 27
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface
Note - The screens shown in this procedure might differ from those for your server.
This procedure uses the basic troubleshooting steps described in “Basic Troubleshooting
Process” on page 26.
Use this procedure to troubleshoot hardware faults with the Oracle ILOM web interface and, if
necessary, prepare the server for service.
Note - This procedure provides one basic approach to troubleshooting hardware faults. It
uses a combination of the Oracle ILOM web interface and command-line interface (CLI).
However, the procedure can be performed using only the Oracle ILOM CLI interface. For
more information about the Oracle ILOM web interface and CLI, refer to the Oracle ILOM
documentation.
Before beginning this procedure, obtain the latest version of the Oracle Server X5-2L Product
Notes.
1.
Log in to the server SP Oracle ILOM web interface.
Open a browser and direct it using the IP address of the server SP. Enter a user name (with
administrator privileges) and password at the log-in screen. The Summary Information screen
appears.
The Status section of the Summary Information screen provides information about the server
subsystems, including:
■
■
■
■
■
■
Processors
Memory
Power
Cooling
Storage
Networking
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
27
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
2.
In the Status section of the Summary Information screen, identify the server
subsystem that requires service.
In the above example, the Status screen shows that the Processor subsystem requires service.
This indicates that a hardware component within the subsystem is in a fault state.
3.
To identify the component, click on Processors in the Status section.
The Processor screen appears.
The above example shows the Processors subsystem screen and indicates that CPU 0 has a
fault.
4.
28
To get more information, click one of the Open Problems links.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
The Open Problems screen provides detailed information, such as the time the event occurred,
the component and subsystem name, and a description of the issue. It also includes a link to an
Oracle KnowledgeBase article.
Tip - The System Log provides a chronological list of all the system events and faults that
have occurred since the log was last reset and includes additional information, such as severity
levels and error counts. The System Log also includes information on device not reported in the
Subsystem Summary screen. To access the System Log, in the left panel, click System Log .
In this example, the hardware fault with CPU 0 requires local/physical access to the server.
5.
Before going to the server, review the Oracle Server X5-2L Product Notes for
information related to the issue or the component.
The product notes contain up-to-date information about the server, including hardware-related
issues.
6.
To prepare the server for service, see “Preparing for Service”.
After servicing the component, you might need to clear the fault in Oracle ILOM. For more
information, refer the service procedure for the component.
7.
Service the component.
Troubleshooting and Diagnostic Information
The following table lists diagnostic and troubleshooting-related procedures and references that
can assist you with resolving server issues.
Description
Link
Diagnostic information for the x86 servers, including
procedures for performing runtime and firmware-based
tests, using Oracle ILOM, and running U-Boot and UEFI
Diagnostics tests to exercise the system and isolate subtle
and intermittent hardware-related problems.
Oracle x86 Servers Diagnostics, Applications, and
Utilities Guide for Servers with Oracle ILOM 3.1 and
Oracle ILOM 3.2.x
Administrative information for the Oracle Sun Server
X-5 series servers, including information about how to
use Oracle System Assistant and using the Oracle ILOM
system event log (SEL) to identify a problem's possible
source.
Oracle X5 Series Servers Administration Guide
Information about troubleshooting front and rear panel
status indicators.
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel
Status Indicators ” on page 30
Information about how to manage server hardware faults
using the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell.
“Managing Server Hardware Faults Through the Oracle
ILOM Fault Management Shell” on page 39
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
29
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear
Panel Status Indicators
These sections describe the status indicators (LEDs) located on the front and rear of the server,
including those found on components and ports. This section includes the following topics:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Server Boot Process and Normal Operating State Indicators” on page 30
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Server Fan Status Indicators” on page 32
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 33
“Network Management Port Status Indicators” on page 33
“Ethernet Ports Status Indicators” on page 34
“Motherboard Status Indicators” on page 34
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Front Panel Components on Eight Drive Systems” on page 14
“Front Panel Components on Twelve Drive Systems” on page 16
“Front Panel Components on Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 17
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
Server Boot Process and Normal Operating State Indicators
A normal server boot process involves two indicators, the service processor SP OK LED
indicator and the Power/OK LED indicator.
When AC power is connected to the server, the server boots into standby power mode:
1. The SP OK LED blinks slowly (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off) while the SP is starting,
and the main Power/OK LED remains off until the SP is ready.
2. After a few minutes, the main Power/OK LED slowly flashes the standby blink pattern (0.1
seconds on, 2.9 seconds off), indicating that the SP (and Oracle ILOM) is ready for use. In
standby power mode, the server is not initialized or fully powered on at this point.
When powering on the server (either by the Power button or Oracle ILOM), the server boots to
full power mode:
1. The Power/OK LED blinks slowly (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off), and the SP OK LED
remains lit (no blinking).
2. When the server has successfully booted, the Power/OK LED remains lit. When the Power/
OK LED and the SP OK LED indicators remain lit, the server is in full power mode.
30
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Note - The green Power/OK LED indicator and the green SP OK indicator remain lit (no
blinking) when the server is in a normal operating state.
Server System-Level Status Indicators
There are seven system-level status indicators (LEDs), some of which are located on both the
server front panel and the server back panel. The following table describes these indicators.
TABLE 1
Status
Indicator
Name
Server System-Level Status Indicators
Icon
Locator LED
and button
Color
State and Meaning
White
Indicates the location of the server.
■ OFF – Server is operating normally.
■ FAST BLINK – Use Oracle ILOM to activate this LED indicator to enable you to locate a
particular system quickly and easily.
■ Pressing the Locate button will toggle the LED indicator fast blink on or off.
Service
Required
Amber
Indicates the fault state of the server.
■ OFF – The server is operating normally.
■ STEADY ON – A fault is present on the server. This LED indicator lights whenever a fault
indicator lights for a replaceable component on the server.
Note - When this LED indicator is lit, a system console message might appear that includes a
recommended service action.
Power/OK
Green
Indicates the operational state of the chassis.
■ OFF – AC power is not present or the Oracle ILOM boot is not complete.
■ STANDBY BLINK – Standby power is on, but the chassis power is off and the Oracle
ILOM SP is running.
■ SLOW BLINK – Startup sequence has been initiated on the host. This pattern should begin
soon after you power on the server. This status indicates either: power-on self-test (POST)
code checkpoint tests are running on the server host system, or the host is transitioning from
the powered-on state to the standby state on shutdown.
■ STEADY ON – The server is powered on, and all host POST code checkpoint tests
are complete. The server is in one of the following states: the server host is booting the
operating system (OS), or the server host is running the OS.
SP OK
Green
Indicates the state of the service processor.
■ OFF – Service processor (SP) is not running.
■ SLOW BLINK – SP is booting.
■ STEADY ON – SP is fully operational.
Top Fan
Top
Amber
Indicates that one or more of the internal fan modules have failed.
■ OFF – Indicates steady state; no service is required.
■ STEADY ON – Indicates service required.
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
31
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Status
Indicator
Name
Rear Power
Supply Fault
Icon
Color
State and Meaning
Rear
Amber
Indicates that one of the server power supplies has failed.
■ OFF – Indicates steady state; no service is required.
■ STEADY ON – Indicates service required; service the power supply.
System Over
Temperature
Warning
Amber
Indicates a warning for an overtemperature condition.
■ OFF – Normal operation; no service is required.
■ STEADY ON – The system is experiencing an overtemperature warning condition.
Note - This is a warning indication, not a fatal overtemperature. Failure to correct this might
result in the system overheating and shutting down unexpectedly.
Server Fan Status Indicators
Each fan module has one status indicator (LED). The LEDs are located on the chassis midwall adjacent to and aligned with the fan modules and are visible when the top cover fan door is
open.
TABLE 2
Server Fan Status Indicators
Status
Indicator
Name
Icon
Color
State and Meaning
Fan Status
None
Amber
■ Off – The fan module is correctly installed and operating within specification.
■ Amber – The fan module is faulty. The front TOP FAN LED and the front and rear
panel Service Required LEDs are also lit if the system detects a fan module fault.
Storage and Boot Drive Indicators
There are three status indicators (LEDs) on each drive.
TABLE 3
Status
Indicator Name
Server Front Storage and Boot Disk Drive Indicators
Color
State and Meaning
OK/Activity
Green
■ OFF – Power is off or installed drive is not recognized by the system.†
■ STEADY ON – The drive is engaged and is receiving power.
■ RANDOM BLINKING – There is disk activity. Status indicator LED blinks on and off to
indicate activity.
Service
Required
Amber
■ OFF – The storage drive is operating normally.
■ STEADY ON – The system has detected a fault with the storage drive.
32
Icon
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Status
Indicator Name
Icon
OK to Remove
Color
State and Meaning
Blue
■ STEADY ON – The storage drive can be removed safely during a hot-plug operation.
■ OFF – The storage drive has not been prepared for removal.
†
If a rear backplane hard disk's OK/Activity LED shuts off, it may also indicate that a rear hard disk has spun down into a temporary "suspend" mode, in which
case the disk would again spin up when coming out of suspend mode.
Power Supply Status Indicators
There are two status indicators (LEDs) on each power supply. These indicators are visible from
the rear of the server.
TABLE 4
Status
Indicator
Name
Server Power Supply Indicators
Icon
Color
State and Meaning
AC OK/ DC
OK
Green
■ OFF – No AC power is present.
■ SLOW BLINK – Normal operation. Input power is within
specification. DC output voltage is not enabled.
■ STEADY ON – Normal operation. Input AC power and DC
output voltage are within specification.
Service
Required
Amber
■ OFF – Normal operation. No service action is required.
■ STEADY ON – The power supply (PS) has detected a PS fan
failure, PS overtemperature, PS over current, or PS over or under
voltage.
Network Management Port Status Indicators
The server has one 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet management domain interface, labeled NET
MGT. There are two status indicators (LEDs) on this port. These indicators are visible from the
rear of the server.
TABLE 5
Network Management Port Status Indicators
Status
Indicator
Name
Location
Color
State and Meaning
Activity
Top left
Amber
■ ON – Link up.
■ OFF – No link or down link.
■ FLASHING – Packet activity.
Link speed
Top right
Green
■ Green ON – 1000BASE-T link.
■ OFF – 10/100BASE-T link.
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
33
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Ethernet Ports Status Indicators
The server has four Gigabit Ethernet ports (NET 3, NET 2, NET 1, and NET 0). There are two
status indicators on each port. These indicators (LEDs) are visible from the rear of the server.
Note - Ethernet ports NET 2 and NET 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.
TABLE 6
Gigabit Ethernet Port Status Indicators
Status
Indicator Name
Location
Color
State and Meaning
Activity
Top left
Green
■ ON – No function.
■ OFF– No activity.
■ FLASHING – Packet activity.
Link speed
Top right
Bicolored: Amber/
Green
■
■
■
■
OFF – 100BASE-T link.
Amber ON – 1000BASE-T link.
Green ON – 10GBBASE-T link.
FLASHING – No function.
Motherboard Status Indicators
The motherboard contains the following status indicators (LEDs).
■
■
■
■
34
DIMM Fault Status Indicators: Each of the 24 DIMM sockets on the motherboard has
an amber fault status indicator (LED) associated with it. If Oracle ILOM determines that
a DIMM is faulty, pressing the Fault Remind button on the motherboard I/O card signals
the service processor to light the fault LED associated with the failed DIMM. For more
information on DIMM fault status indicators and the location of the Fault Remind Button,
see “Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 101.
Processor Fault Status Indicators: The motherboard includes a fault status indicator
(LED) adjacent to each of the two processor sockets. These LEDs indicate when a processor
fails. Pressing the Fault Remind button on the motherboard I/O card signals the service
processor to light the fault status indicators associated with the failed processors. For more
information on processor fault status indicators and the location of the Fault Remind Button,
see “Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 129.
Fault Remind Status Indicator: This status indicator (LED) is located next to the Fault
Remind button and is powered from the super capacitor that powers the fault LEDs on the
motherboard. This LED lights to indicate that the fault remind circuitry is working properly
in cases where no components have failed and, as a result, none of the component fault
LEDs illuminate. For more information on the fault remind status indicator and the location
of the Fault Remind Button, see “Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 108.
STBY PWRGD Status Indicator: This green status indicator (LED) is labeled STBY
PWRGD and is located on the motherboard near the rear of the server. This LED lights
to inform a service technician that the motherboard is receiving standby power from at
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
least one of the power supplies. This LED is provided to help prevent service actions on
the server internal components while the AC power cords are installed and power is being
supplied to the server.
Note - The service instructions for all internal components require that all AC power be
removed from the power supplies prior to the server top cover being removed.
Troubleshooting System Cooling Issues
Maintaining the proper internal operating temperature of the server is crucial to the health of the
server. To prevent server shutdown and damage to components, address over temperature and
hardware-related issues as soon as they occur. If your server has a temperature-related fault, the
cause of the problem might be:
■
■
■
■
“External Ambient Temperature Too High” on page 35
“Airflow Blockage” on page 35
“Cooling Areas Compromised” on page 36
“Hardware Component Failure” on page 36
External Ambient Temperature Too High
Server component cooling relies on the movement of cool air through the server. The cool air is
pulled into the server from its external environment. If the ambient temperature of the server's
external environment is too high, cooling does not occur, and the internal temperature of the
server and its components increases. This can cause poor server performance or a failure of one
or more components.
Action: Check the ambient temperature of the server space against the environmental
specifications for the server. If the temperature is not within the required operating range,
remedy the situation immediately.
Prevention: Periodically check the ambient temperature of the server space to ensure that it
is within the required range, especially if you have made any changes to the server space (for
example, added additional servers). The temperature must be consistent and stable.
Airflow Blockage
The server cooling system uses fans to pull cool air in from the server front intake vents and
exhaust warm air out the server back panel vents. If the front or back vents are blocked, the
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
35
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
airflow through the server is disrupted and the cooling system fails to function properly causing
the server internal temperature to rise.
Action: Inspect the server front and back panel vents for blockage from dust or debris.
Additionally, inspect the server interior for improperly installed components or cables that can
block the flow of air through the server.
Prevention: Periodically inspect and clean the server vents using an ESD certified vacuum
cleaner. Ensure that all components, such as cards, cable, fans, air baffles and dividers are
properly installed. Never operate the server without the top cover installed.
Cooling Areas Compromised
To function properly, the server has cooling areas that are maintained by an air baffle,
component filler panels, and the server top cover. These server components need to be in place
for the server to function as a sealed system. If internal cooling areas are compromised, the
server cooling system, which relies on the movement of cool air through the server, cannot
function properly, and the airflow inside the server becomes chaotic and non-directional.
Action: Inspect the server interior to ensure that the air baffle is properly installed. Ensure that
all external-facing slots (storage drive, DVD, PCIe) are occupied with either a component or a
component filler panel. Ensure that the server top cover is in place and sits flat and snug on top
of the server.
Prevention: When servicing the server, ensure that the air baffle is installed correctly and that
the server has no unoccupied external-facing slots. Never operate the server without the top
cover installed.
Hardware Component Failure
Components, such as power supplies and fan modules, are an integral part of the server cooling
system. When one of these components fails, the server internal temperature can rise. This rise
in temperature can cause other components to enter into an over-temperature state. Additionally,
some components, such as processors, might overheat when they are failing, which can also
generate an over-temperature event.
To reduce the risk related to component failure, power supplies and fan modules are installed
in pairs to provide redundancy. Redundancy ensures that if one component in the pair fails,
the other functioning component can continue to maintain the subsystem. For example, power
supplies serve a dual function; they provide both power and airflow. If one power supply fails,
the other functioning power supply can maintain both the power and the cooling subsystems.
Action: Investigate the cause of the over-temperature event, and replace failed components
immediately. For hardware troubleshooting information, see “Troubleshooting Server Hardware
Faults” on page 26.
36
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Prevention: Component redundancy is provided to allow for component failure in critical
subsystems, such as the cooling subsystem. However, once a component in a redundant
system fails, the redundancy no longer exists, and the risk for server shutdown and component
failures increases. Therefore, it is important to maintain redundant systems and replace failed
components immediately.
Troubleshooting Power Issues
If your server does not power on, the cause of the problem might be:
■
■
■
“AC Power Connection” on page 37
“Power Supplies (PSUs)” on page 37
“Top Cover” on page 38
AC Power Connection
The AC power cords are the direct connection between the server power supplies and the power
sources. The server power supplies need separate stable AC circuits. Insufficient voltage levels
or fluctuations in power can cause server power problems. The power supplies are designed to
operate at a particular voltage and within an acceptable range of voltage fluctuations (refer to
“Electrical Power Requirements” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”).
Action: Check that both AC power cords are connected to the server. Check that the correct
power is present at the outlets and monitor the power to verify that it is within the acceptable
range. You can verify proper connection and operation by checking the power supply (PS)
indicator panels, which are located at the back of the server on the power supplies. Lit green AC
OK indicators show a properly functioning power supply. An amber AC OK indicator indicates
that the AC power to the power supply is insufficient.
Prevention: Use the AC power cord Velcro retaining clips and position the cords to minimize
the risk of accidental disconnection. Ensure that the AC circuits that supply power to the server
are stable and not overburdened.
Power Supplies (PSUs)
The server power supplies (PSUs) provide the necessary server voltages from the AC power
outlets. If the power supplies are inoperable, unplugged, or disengaged from the internal
connectors, the server cannot power on.
Note - The Velcro straps shown in the following figure should be used to secure the power cord
connectors to the rear of the power supplies. The Velcro retaining straps minimize the risk of
accidental disconnection.
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
37
Troubleshoot Hardware Faults Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Action: Check that the AC cables are connected to both power supplies. Check that the power
supplies are operational (the PSU indicator panel should have a lit green AC OK indicator).
Ensure that the power supply is properly installed. A power supply that is not fully engaged
with its internal connector does not have power applied and does not have a lit green AC OK
indicator.
Prevention: When a power supply fails, replace it immediately. To ensure redundancy, the
server has two power supplies. This redundant configuration prevents server downtime, or
an unexpected shutdown, due to a failed power supply. The redundancy allows the server to
continue to operate if one of the power supplies fails. However, when a server is being powered
by a single power supply, the redundancy no longer exists, and the risk for downtime or an
unexpected shutdown increases. When installing a power supply, ensure that it is fully seated
and engaged with its connector inside the drive bay. A properly installed power supply has a lit
green AC OK indicator.
Top Cover
The server top cover is an important component for a properly functioning server. The top cover
is vital to the server cooling subsystem because it helps to maintain the pressure areas within
the server, and the top cover also protects against accidental exposure to hazardous voltages
and damage to internal components. For these reasons, the server top cover is interlocked to
the server power. The interlock is created by a switch that is mounted inside the server on the
housing for the power supply. The switch engages when the cover is installed, allowing power
38
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools
to be applied to the server. When the cover is not installed, the server cannot power on. If the
server is powered on when the cover is removed, power is immediately switched off.
Action: If the server does not power on, check that the switch is intact and properly
aligned. Ensure that the server top cover is in place and sits flat and snug on top of the
server. Ensure that the interlock switch components have not been damaged, removed, or
misaligned. For instructions for properly installing the top cover, see “Install the Server Top
Cover” on page 226.
Prevention: After removing the top cover, take care that it does not get bent. When servicing
the server, take care that the internally mounted interlock switch component does not get
damaged or misaligned. Never operate the server without the top cover installed.
Managing Server Hardware Faults Through the
Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell
The Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell enables Oracle Services personnel to view and
manage fault activity on a managed servers and other types of devices.
For more information about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell, see the
Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and Diagnostics Firmware Release 3.2.x in
the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Caution - The purpose of the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell is to help Oracle Services
personnel diagnose system problems. Customers should not launch this shell or run fault
management commands in the shell unless requested to do so by Oracle Services.
Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools
The server and its accompanying software and firmware contain diagnostic tools and features
that can help you isolate component problems, monitor the status of a functioning system,
and exercise one or more subsystem to disclose more subtle or intermittent hardware-related
problems.
Each diagnostic tool has its own specific strength and application. Review the tools listed in
this section and determine which tool might be best to use for your situation. Once you have
determined the tool to use, you can access it locally, while at the server, or remotely.
■
“Diagnostic Tools” on page 40
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
39
Troubleshooting With Diagnostic Tools
■
“Diagnostic Tool Documentation” on page 41
Diagnostic Tools
The selection of diagnostic tools available for your server range in complexity from a
comprehensive validation test suite (Oracle VTS) to a chronological event log (Oracle ILOM
System Log). The selection of diagnostic tools also includes standalone software packages,
firmware-based tests, and hardware-based LED indicators.
The following table summarizes the diagnostic tools that you can use when troubleshooting or
monitoring your server.
40
Diagnostic Tool
Type
What It Does
Accessibility
Remote Capability
Oracle ILOM
SP firmware
Monitors environmental
condition and component
functionality sensors, generates
alerts, performs fault isolation,
and provides remote access.
Can function on either
standby power mode or
full power mode and is
not OS dependent.
Designed for
remote and local
access.
Preboot Menu
SP firmware
Enables you to restore some
Oracle ILOM default settings
when Oracle ILOM is not
accessible.
Can function on standby
power and when
operating system is not
running.
Local, but remote
serial access is
possible if the
SP serial port is
connected to a
network-accessible
terminal server.
Hardware-based
LED indicators
Hardware
and SP
firmware
Indicates status of overall
system and particular
components.
Available when system
power is available.
Local, but sensor
and indicators are
accessible from
Oracle ILOM
web interface or
command-line
interface (CLI).
Power-On SelfTest (POST)
Host
firmware
Tests core components of
system: CPUs, memory,
and motherboard I/O bridge
integrated circuits.
Runs on startup.
Available when the
operating system is not
running.
Local, but can be
accessed through
Oracle ILOM
Remote System
Console Plus.
U-Boot
SP firmware
Initializes and test aspects of
the service processor (SP) prior
to booting the Oracle ILOM SP
and operating system. Tests SP
memory, SP, network devices
and I/O devices.
Can function on standby
power and when
operating system is not
running.
Local, but remote
serial access is
possible if the
SP serial port is
connected to a
network-accessible
terminal server.
UEFI
Diagnostics
SP firmware
The UEFI diagnostics can
test and detect problems on
all processors, memory, disk
drives, and network ports. It is
used on newer Oracle systems,
You can use either
the Oracle ILOM
web interface or the
command-line interface
Remote access
through Oracle
ILOM Remote
System Console
Plus.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Attaching Devices to the Server
Diagnostic Tool
Type
What It Does
Accessibility
such as the Oracle Server X52L.
(CLI) to run UEFI
diagnostics.
Remote Capability
Oracle Solaris
commands
Operating
system
software
Displays various kinds of
system information.
Requires operating
system.
Local, and over
network.
Oracle Linux
commands
Operating
system
software
Displays various kinds of
system information.
Requires operating
system.
Local, and over
network.
Oracle VTS
Diagnostic
tool
standalone
software
Exercises and stresses the
system, running tests in
parallel.
Requires the Solaris
operating system. Install
Oracle VTS software
separately.
View and control
over network.
Diagnostic Tool Documentation
The following table identifies where you can find more information about diagnostic tools.
Diagnostic Tool
Documentation
Location
Oracle ILOM
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager 3.2
Documentation Library
http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs
Preboot Menu
Oracle x86 Servers Diagnostics Guide
http://www.oracle.com/goto/
x86AdminDiag/docs
System indicators and
sensors
This document
“Troubleshooting Using the Server
Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators
” on page 30
U-Boot or UEFI Diags
Oracle x86 Servers Diagnostics Guide
http://www.oracle.com/goto/
x86AdminDiag/docs
Oracle VTS
Oracle VTS software and documentation
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19719-01/
index.html
Attaching Devices to the Server
The following sections contain procedural information for attaching devices to the server so you
can access diagnostic tools when troubleshooting and servicing the server:
■
■
■
■
“Attach Devices to the Server” on page 42
“Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 42
“Configuring Serial Port Sharing” on page 44
“Server Operating System Names for the NVMe Storage Drives” on page 45
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
41
Attach Devices to the Server
■
■
“Ethernet Port Boot Order and Device Naming” on page 46
“Rear Panel Pinhole Switches” on page 47
Attach Devices to the Server
This procedure explains how to connect devices to the server (remotely and locally), so that you
can interact with the service processor (SP) and the server console.
1.
Connect an Ethernet cable to the Gigabit Ethernet (NET) connectors as needed
for OS support.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 42.
2.
To connect to the service processor's Oracle ILOM over the network, connect an
Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port labeled NET MGT.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 42.
3.
To access the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI) locally using the
management port, connect a serial null modem cable to the RJ-45 serial port
labeled SER MGT.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 42.
4.
To interact with the system console locally, connect a mouse and keyboard to
the USB connectors and a monitor to the DB-15 video connector.
See “Rear Panel Connector Locations” on page 42.
Rear Panel Connector Locations
The following illustration shows and describes the locations of the back panel connectors. Use
this information to set up the server, so that you can access diagnostic tools and manage the
server during service.
42
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Attach Devices to the Server
No.
Cable Port or Expansion Slot
Description
1
Power supply 0 input power
The server has two power supply connectors, one for each power supply.
Power supply 1 input power
Do not attach power cables to the power supplies until you have finished
connecting the data cables to the server. The server goes into standby power
mode, and the Oracle ILOM service processor initializes when the AC
power cables are connected to the power source. System messages might
be lost after 60 seconds if the server is not connected to a terminal, PC, or
workstation.
Note - Oracle ILOM will signal a fault on any installed power supply that
is not connected to an AC power source, since it might indicate a loss of
redundancy.
2
Network management port (NET MGT)
The service processor NET MGT port is the optional connection to the
Oracle ILOM service processor. The NET MGT port is configured by default
to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). The service processor
NET MGT port uses an RJ-45 cable for a 10/100/1000BASE-T connection.
3
Serial management port (SER MGT)
The service processor SER MGT port uses an RJ-45 cable and is the default
connection to the Oracle ILOM service processor. This port supports local
connections to the server and only recognizes Oracle ILOM command-line
interface (CLI) commands. Typically you connect a terminal or terminal
emulator to this port.
Note - This port does not support network connections.
4
Ethernet ports (NET 3, NET 2, NET 1, NET 0)
The four 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports enable you to connect the system to the
network.
Note - Ethernet ports NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-processor
systems.
5, 6
USB ports (USB 0, USB 1)
The two USB ports support hot-plugging. You can connect and disconnect
USB cables and peripheral devices while the server is running without
affecting system operations.
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
43
Assign Serial Port Output Using the CLI
No.
Cable Port or Expansion Slot
Description
7
Video port (VGA)
Use a 15-pin video cable to connect a VGA video device to the server.
Optionally, you can connect to the VGA port when installing the operating
system.
Configuring Serial Port Sharing
By default, the SP console (SER MGT) port sends serial port output from the server. Using
Oracle ILOM, you can specify that the host console (COM1) be assigned as owner of the server
serial port output. This feature is useful for Windows kernel debugging, as it enables you to
view non-ASCII character traffic from the host console.
You should set up the network on the SP before attempting to change the serial port owner to
the host server. If the network is not set up, and you switch the serial port owner to the host
server, you will be unable to connect using the CLI or web interface to change the serial port
owner back to the SP. To return the serial port owner setting to the SP, you need to restore
access to the serial port on the server. For more details about restoring access to the server
port on your server, see the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation
Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
You can assign serial port output using either the Oracle ILOM web interface or the commandline interface (CLI). For instructions, see the following sections:
■
■
“Assign Serial Port Output Using the CLI” on page 44
“Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface” on page 45
Assign Serial Port Output Using the CLI
1.
Open an SSH session and at the command line log in to the SP Oracle ILOM CLI.
Log in as a user with root or administrator privileges. For example:
ssh [email protected]
Where ipaddress is the IP address of the server SP.
For more information, see “Accessing Oracle ILOM” in the Oracle X5 Series Servers
Administration Guide.
The Oracle ILOM CLI prompt (->) appears.
2.
To set the serial port owner, type:
-> set /SP/serial/portsharing owner=host
Note - The serial port sharing value by default is owner=SP.
44
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface
3.
Connect a serial host to the server.
Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface
1.
Log in to the SP Oracle ILOM web interface.
To log in, open a web browser and direct it using the IP address of the server SP. Log in as root
or a user with administrator privileges. See “Accessing Oracle ILOM” in the Oracle X5 Series
Servers Administration Guide.
The Summary Information screen appears.
2.
In the Oracle ILOM web interface, select ILOM Administration → Connectivity
from the navigation menu on the left side of the screen.
3.
Select the Serial Port tab.
The Serial Port Settings page appears.
Note - The serial port sharing setting by default is Service Processor.
4.
In the Serial Port Settings page, select Host Server as the serial port owner.
5.
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
6.
Connect a serial host to the server.
Server Operating System Names for the NVMe
Storage Drives
If the optional NVMe storage drives are installed in the server's front panel, they are labeled
NVMe0, NVMe1, NVMe2, and NVMe3. However, the server operating systems assign these
storage drives different names. For the corresponding names assigned by the operating systems,
see the following table.
TABLE 7
Operating System NVMe Storage Drive Nomenclature
Storage Drive Labels
Names Assigned by the Server Operating Systems
NVMe0
PCI-Express Slot 10
NVMe1
PCI-Express Slot 11
NVMe2
PCI-Express Slot 12
NVMe3
PCI-Express Slot 13
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
45
Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface
Ethernet Port Boot Order and Device Naming
This section contains information about the boot order and device naming for the four 10Gigabit Ethernet ports on the rear panel of the server. For location information, see “Rear Panel
Connector Locations” on page 42. From right to left, the ports are numbered NET 0 to NET
3.
Ethernet Port Boot Order
The order in which the BIOS detects the Ethernet ports during server boot is listed below.
Note - You can change the boot priority using the Boot Device Priority screen available in the
Boot menu of the BIOS Setup Utility.
1. NET 0
2. NET 1
3. NET 2
4. NET 3
Ethernet Port Device Naming
Note - Naming used by the interfaces might vary from that listed below depending on which
devices are installed in the system.
The device naming for the Ethernet interfaces is reported differently by different interfaces and
operating systems. The following table shows BIOS (physical) and operating system (logical)
naming conventions used for each interface. These naming conventions might vary depending
on conventions of your operating system and which devices are installed in the server.
46
Port
BIOS
Solaris
Linux
Windows (example default
names, see note below)
NET 0
3A00
ixgbe 0
eth 0
Ethernet
NET 1
3A01
ixgbe 1
eth 1
Ethernet 2
NET 2
8200
ixgbe 2
eth 2
Ethernet 3
NET 3
8201
ixgbe 3
eth 3
Ethernet 4
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Assign Serial Port Output Using the Web Interface
Note - For Windows, port names like Ethernet, Ethernet 2, Ethernet 3, and Ethernet 4 are used
by default. However, actual port naming is based on the order of enumeration, typically during
operating system installation. Additionally, Windows allows you to rename the ports to meet
application-specific needs.
Rear Panel Pinhole Switches
This section shows the location of the rear panel pinhole switches.
FIGURE 6
Rear Panel Pinhole Switches
Figure Legend
Description
1
SP Reset
2
Host Warm Reset
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
47
Getting Help
Figure Legend
Description
3
Non-maskable interrupt
(NMI)†
†
Oracle Service use only.
Getting Help
The following sections describe how to get additional help to resolve server-related problems.
■
■
“Contacting Support” on page 48
“Locating the Chassis Serial Number” on page 49
Contacting Support
If the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter fail to solve your problem, use the following
table to collect information that you might need to communicate to support personnel.
System Configuration
Information Needed
Service contract number
System model
Operating environment
System serial number
Peripherals attached to the system
Email address and phone number
for you and a secondary contact
Street address where the system is
located
Superuser password
Summary of the problem and
the work being done when the
problem occurred
Other Useful Information
IP address
Server name (system host name)
Network or internet domain name
Proxy server configuration
48
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Your Information
Getting Help
Related Information
■
“Locating the Chassis Serial Number” on page 49
Locating the Chassis Serial Number
You might need to have your server serial number when you ask for service on your system.
Record this number for future use. Use one of the following resources or methods to locate your
server serial number.
■
■
■
■
■
The serial number is located on the Radio-frequency Identification (RFID) label on the
bottom left side of the front panel bezel, below the general status LEDs.
For illustrations of the storage cell front panel, see “About Controls and
Connectors” on page 14.
The serial number is recorded on the service label that is attached to the top cover of the
system.
The serial number is recorded on the yellow Customer Information Sheet (CIS) that is
attached to your storage cell packaging.
Locate the yellow Customer Information Sheet (CIS) attached to your server packaging.
This sheet includes the serial number.
Using Oracle ILOM:
From the command-line interface (CLI), type the command: show/SYS.
From the web interface, view the serial number on the System Information screen.
Using Oracle System Assistant, view the serial number on the System Overview screen.
■
■
■
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
49
50
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Preparing for Service
These sections describe safety considerations and provide prerequisite procedures and
information about replacing components within the server.
Description
Links
Understand the safety precautions, understand the
safety symbols, and take ESD precautions prior to
removing or installing parts in the server.
“Safety Precautions” on page 51
“Safety Symbols” on page 52
“Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52
Understand the key identity properties auto-update
feature.
“FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 53
Assemble the required tools.
“Required Tools” on page 54
Before working with components within the server,
power down the server and prepare for servicing.
“Preparing the Server for Component
Replacement” on page 54
Related Information
■
“Returning the Server to Operation”
Safety Precautions
For your protection, observe the following safety precautions when setting up your equipment:
■
■
■
■
Follow all standard cautions, warnings, and instructions marked on the equipment and
described in the Oracle Server X5-2L Safety and Compliance Guide and Important Safety
Information for Oracle's Hardware Systems.
Ensure that the voltage and frequency of your power source match the voltage and
frequency inscribed on the equipment electrical rating label.
Follow the electrostatic discharge safety practices as described in “Electrostatic Discharge
Safety” on page 52.
Disconnect both power supply cords before servicing components.
Preparing for Service
51
Safety Symbols
Related Information
■
■
“Safety Symbols” on page 52
“Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52
Safety Symbols
The following symbols might appear in this document. Note their meanings.
Caution - Risk of personal injury or equipment damage. To avoid personal injury or
equipment damage, follow the instructions.
Caution - Hot surface. Avoid contact. Surfaces are hot and might cause personal injury if
touched.
Caution - Hazardous voltages are present. To reduce the risk of electric shock and danger to
personal health, follow the instructions.
Related Information
■
■
“Safety Precautions” on page 51
“Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52
Electrostatic Discharge Safety
Devices that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD), such as the motherboard, PCIe cards,
drives, processors, and memory DIMMs require special handling.
Caution - The boards and drives contain electronic components that are extremely sensitive to
static electricity. Ordinary amounts of static electricity from clothing or the work environment
can destroy components. Do not touch the components along their connector edges.
Do the following when handling ESD-sensitive components:
■
Use an antistatic wrist strap.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap and use an antistatic mat when handling components such as
drive assemblies, boards, or cards. When servicing or removing server components, attach
an antistatic strap to your wrist and then to a metal area on the chassis. Then disconnect
52
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update
the power cords from the server. Following this practice equalizes the electrical potentials
between you and the server.
Note - An antistatic wrist strap is not included in the Accessory Kit for the server. However,
antistatic wrist straps are included with options and components.
■
Use an antistatic mat.
Place ESD-sensitive components such as the motherboard, memory DIMMS, and other
printed circuit board (PCB) cards on an antistatic mat. The following items can be used as
an antistatic mat:
■
■
■
An antistatic bag used to wrap an Oracle replacement part
An Oracle ESD mat (orderable item)
A disposable ESD mat (shipped with some replacement parts or optional system
components)
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Safety Precautions” on page 51
“Safety Symbols” on page 52
“Preparing the Server for Component Replacement” on page 54
“Returning the Server to Operation”
FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update
Oracle ILOM includes a key identity properties (KIP) auto-update feature that ensures product
information that is used for service entitlement and warranty coverage is accurately maintained
by the server at all times, including during hardware replacement activities.
The KIP includes the server product name, product part number (PPN), and product serial
number (PSN). The KIP are stored in the FRUID (field-replaceable unit identifiers) container of
the three server FRUs that are designated quorum members.
The quorum members include:
■
■
■
Disk backplane (DBP), designated as a primary quorum member.
Motherboard (MB), designated as a backup quorum member.
Power supply (PS), designated as a backup quorum member.
When a server FRU that contains the KIP is removed and a replacement component is installed,
the KIP of the replacement component is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same
KIP as the other two components.
Preparing for Service
53
Required Tools
Note - Only one of the quorum members can be replaced at a time. Automated updates can only
be completed when two of the three quorum members contain matching key identity properties.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)” on page 93
“Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146
“Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU)” on page 209
Required Tools
The server can be serviced with the following tools:
■
■
■
■
Antistatic wrist strap
Antistatic mat
Hex/flat head screwdriver
No. 2 Phillips screwdriver
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Preparing for Service”
“Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing FRUs”
Preparing the Server for Component Replacement
Note - When you are replacing the storage drives or power supplies, not all of these procedures
are necessary. See the replacement procedures for those components for more information.
Before you can remove and install components that are inside the server, you must perform the
procedures in the following sections:
■
■
■
■
54
“Powering Down the Server” on page 55
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61
“Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 63
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI
■
■
■
■
“Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
“Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65
“Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67
Related Information
■
“Returning the Server to Operation”
Powering Down the Server
Determine how you want to power down the server by reviewing the options in the following
table.
Description
Link
Power down the server gracefully to prevent data from being
corrupted. Performing a graceful shutdown ensures that the
system is ready for restart.
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the
Oracle ILOM CLI” on page 55
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the
Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 56
■ “Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the
Power Button” on page 57
If the server is not responding, or you must shut down the
server quickly, perform an immediate shutdown.
■ “Power Down the Server for
Immediate Shutdown Using the Power
Button” on page 58
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate
Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI” on page 59
■ “Power Down the Server for Immediate
Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface” on page 59
Related Information
■
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI
Performing a graceful shutdown ensures that all of your data is saved and the system is ready
for restart.
1.
Log in to the server as superuser or equivalent.
Depending on the nature of the problem, you might want to view the system status or the log
files or run diagnostics before you shut down the system. For log file information, refer to the
Preparing for Service
55
Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Collection at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
2.
Notify affected users that the server will be powered down.
3.
Save any open files, and quit all running applications.
Refer to your application documentation for specific information about these processes.
4.
Log in to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI) using an Administrator
account.
For instructions, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation
Collection.
5.
At the Oracle ILOM prompt, shut down the operating system:
-> stop /System
If the system is running the Oracle Solaris OS, refer to the Oracle Solaris system administration
documentation for additional information.
6.
Disconnect the power and cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60.
Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 56
“Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button” on page 57
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 58
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM
Web Interface
Performing a graceful shutdown ensures that all of your data is saved and the system is ready
for restart.
1.
56
Log in to the server as superuser or equivalent.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button
Depending on the nature of the problem, you might want to view the system status or the log
files or run diagnostics before you shut down the system. For log file information, refer to the
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Collection at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
2.
Notify affected users that the server will be powered down.
3.
Save any open files, and quit all running applications.
Refer to your application documentation for specific information about these processes.
4.
Log in to the Oracle ILOM web interface using an Administrator account.
The Oracle ILOM web interface System Information → Summary Information page appears.
5.
In the left pane, click Host Management → Power Control, and click Graceful
Shutdown and Power Off from the Select Action list.
6.
Click Save, and then click OK.
The host server performs an orderly power-down.
7.
Disconnect the power cords and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60.
Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI” on page 55
“Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button” on page 57
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 58
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Power Button
1.
Press and quickly release the Power button on the front panel.
This action causes ACPI-enabled operating systems to perform an orderly shutdown of the
operating system. Servers not running ACPI-enabled operating systems shut down to standby
power mode immediately.
When main power is off, the Power/OK LED on the front panel begins flashing, indicating that
the server is in standby power mode. See “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31.
Preparing for Service
57
Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button
2.
Disconnect the power cords and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60.
Caution - When you power down the server using the Power button, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM CLI” on page 55
“Power Down the Server Gracefully Using the Oracle ILOM Web Interface” on page 56
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the
Power Button
Caution - This procedure quickly forces the server main power off. You might corrupt your
system data during an immediate power-down, so use this procedure to power down the server
only after attempting the graceful power-down procedure.
1.
Press and hold the Power button for four seconds to force the main power off
and to enter standby power mode.
When main power is off, the Power/OK LED on the front panel begins flashing, indicating that
the server is in standby power mode. See “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31.
2.
Disconnect the power cords and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60.
Caution - When you power down the server using the Power button, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.
Related Information
■
■
■
58
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI” on page 59
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface” on page 59
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI
■
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the
Oracle CLI
Caution - This procedure quickly forces the server main power off. You might corrupt your
system data during an immediate power-down, so use this procedure to power down the server
only after attempting the graceful power-down procedure.
1.
Log in to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI) using an Administrator
account.
Oracle ILOM displays the default command prompt (->), indicating that you have successfully
logged in to Oracle ILOM.
2.
From the CLI prompt, type the following command:
-> stop -f /System
The server powers down immediately.
3.
Disconnect the power and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60.
Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 58
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle ILOM Web
Interface” on page 59
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the
Oracle ILOM Web Interface
Caution - This procedure quickly forces the server main power off. You might corrupt your
system data during an immediate power-down, so use this procedure to power down the server
only after attempting the graceful power-down procedure.
Preparing for Service
59
Disconnect Cables From the Server
1.
Log in to the Oracle ILOM web interface using an Administrator account.
The Oracle ILOM web interface System Information → Summary Information page appears.
2.
In the left pane, click Host Management → Power Control, and click Immediate
Power Off in the Select Action list.
3.
Click Save, and then click OK.
The server powers down immediately.
4.
Disconnect the power and data cables from the server.
See “Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60.
Caution - When you power down the server using Oracle ILOM, the server enters standby
power mode. Power is still directed to the service processor remote management subsystem and
power supply fans. To completely power off the server, you must disconnect the power cords
from the power supplies.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Power Button” on page 58
“Power Down the Server for Immediate Shutdown Using the Oracle CLI” on page 59
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Disconnect Cables From the Server
Caution - The system supplies standby power to the circuit boards even when the system is
powered off.
1.
Label all cables connected to the server.
2.
Power down the server.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
60
3.
Disconnect the power cords from the rear of the server.
4.
Disconnect all data cables from the rear of the server.
5.
If your rackmount kit includes a cable management device, remove the cables
from it.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position
6.
Depending on the components that you are servicing, either extend the server to
the maintenance position, or remove the server from the rack.
Related Information
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Powering Down the Server” on page 55
“Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61
“Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 63
■
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
■
■
■
Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position
The following components can be serviced with the server in the maintenance position:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Storage drives
Fan modules
Power supplies
DVD drive
DDR4 DIMMs
PCIe cards and cables
SAS cables
NVMe cables
Internal USB drives
System battery
Processors
Disk backplanes
Front indicator modules
Motherboard
If the server is installed in a rack with extendable slide-rails, use this procedure to extend the
server to the maintenance position.
1.
To prevent the rack from tipping forward when the server is extended, extend all
rack anti-tilt devices.
For instructions for stabilizing the rack, refer to “Stabilize the Rack for Installation” in “Oracle
Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
2.
Verify that no cables will be damaged or will interfere when the server is
extended.
Preparing for Service
61
Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position
Although the cable management arm (CMA) that is supplied with the server is hinged to
accommodate extending the server, you should ensure that all cables and cords are capable of
extending.
3.
From the front of the server, open and hold the left and right release latch covers
in the open position.
When in an open position, the release latch covers engage the slide-rail release latches [1].
Caution - Deploy any rack anti-tilt mechanism before releasing the slide-rail release latches.
FIGURE 7
4.
Extending the Server to the Maintenance Position
While the release latch covers are in the open position, slowly pull the server
forward until the slide-rails latch into a locked position [2].
The server is now in the extended maintenance position.
Related Information
■
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
■
“Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 63
“Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 230
■
62
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Server From the Rack
Remove the Server From the Rack
Caution - The server weighs approximately 63 pounds (28.5 kg). Two people are required to
unmount and carry the chassis.
1.
Disconnect all the cables and power cords from the server.
2.
Remove the cable management arm (CMA).
For instructions for removing the CMA, see the “Remove the Cable Management Arm” in
“Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
3.
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
4.
From the front of the server, pull the green slide-rail release tabs toward the front
of the server, and pull the server out of the rack until it is free of the rack rails [1
and 2].
A slide-rail release tab is located on each slide-rail.
FIGURE 8
5.
Removing the Server From the Chassis
Set the server on a sturdy work surface.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61
“Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 230
Preparing for Service
63
Take Antistatic Measures
Take Antistatic Measures
1.
Prepare an antistatic surface on which to set parts during removal and
installation.
Place electrostatic discharge (ESD-sensitive components on an antistatic mat. The following
items can be used as an antistatic mat:
■
■
■
2.
An antistatic bag used to wrap a replacement part
An Oracle ESD mat (orderable item)
A disposable ESD mat (shipped with some replacement parts or optional system
components)
Attach an antistatic wrist strap.
When servicing or removing server components, attach an antistatic strap to your wrist and then
to a metal area on the chassis. Then perform procedures for servicing the server.
Note - An antistatic wrist strap is not included in the Accessory Kit for the server. However,
antistatic wrist straps are included with options and components.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
“Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61
“Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 63
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
“Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65
“Remove Antistatic Measures” on page 230
Remove the Server Top Cover
Caution - If you remove the top cover without first removing the AC power cords, then not
only will the server host shut down, but also this condition will be flagged as a system fault
(that is, the fault LEDs will light).
Note - Servicing some components requires that the top cover be removed.
1.
Ensure that AC power cords are disconnected from the server power supplies.
2.
Unlatch the top cover [1].
Press the green release button on the top of the server cover.
64
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server
FIGURE 9
Removing the Server Top Cover
3.
While pressing the top cover release button, slide the cover toward the rear of
the server [2].
4.
If necessary, open the fan assembly door.
5.
Lift up and remove the top cover [2].
Related Information
■
■
■
“Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64
“Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65
“Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226
Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server
Before you service the server's storage drive backplane, you should first remove the server's
front fan assembly door.
Note - This procedure is only required for systems configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage
drives or twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives. If your system is configured with eight 2.5-inch
storage drives, see “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
Preparing for Service
65
Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server
1.
Ensure that the AC power cords are disconnected from the server power
supplies.
2.
Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the fan
assembly door [1].
■
If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, remove the
two screws on each side of the chassis and the three screws on top of the
chassis.
■
If your system is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives,
remove the two screws on each side of the chassis.
FIGURE 10
3.
Removing the Fan Assembly Door
Slide the fan assembly door toward the rear of the server, and lift and remove the
door from the chassis [2].
Related Information
■
“Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64
■
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
“Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226
“Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228
■
■
66
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server
Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server
Before you service the server's storage drive backplane, you should first remove the server's
disk cage cover.
Note - This procedure is only required for systems configured with eight 2.5-inch storage
drives. If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-four 2.5-inch
storage drives, see “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
1.
Ensure that the AC power cords are disconnected from the server power
supplies.
2.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the twelve screws (three on each top
side of the chassis, and three on each side of the chassis) that secure the disk
cage cover [1].
Preparing for Service
67
Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server
FIGURE 11
3.
Removing the Disk Cage Cover
Slide the cover forward and lift to remove the disk cage cover from the chassis
[2].
Related Information
■
■
■
68
“Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
“Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server
■
“Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229
Preparing for Service
69
70
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server
Power-Off
These sections describe how to service customer-replaceable units (CRUs) that do not
require you to power off the server. For more information about CRUs, see “Illustrated Parts
Breakdown” on page 19 and “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 21.
Description
Links
Service storage and boot drives.
“Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives
(CRU)” on page 71
Service fan modules.
“Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)” on page 89
Service power supplies.
“Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)” on page 93
Related Information
■
■
“Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing FRUs”
Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)
These sections describe how to remove and install storage drives.
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 72
“Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 72
“Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
“Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Solaris” on page 79
“Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Linux” on page 82
“Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive” on page 86
Related Information
■
“Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 167
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
71
Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)
■
“Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 174
Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions
The hard-disk drives (HDDs), solid-state drives (SSDs), and NVMe SSD drives installed in the
server are hot-pluggable, but this capability depends on how the drives are configured. To hotplug a drive you must be able to take the drive offline before you can remove it. When you take
the drive offline, you prevent any application from accessing the drive and remove the logical
software links to the drive.
The following conditions inhibit the ability to perform hot-plugging of a drive:
■
■
The drive provides the operating system, and the operating system is not mirrored on
another drive.
The drive cannot be logically isolated from the online operations of the server.
If either of the disk drive conditions is true, then you must shut down the system before you
replace the drive. See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
Note - Replacing a drive does not require removing the server from a rack.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
“Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Solaris” on page 79
“Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive Using Oracle Linux” on page 82
“Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive” on page 86
Storage Drive Failure and RAID
A single storage drive failure does not cause a data failure if the storage drives are configured
as a mirrored RAID 1 volume (optional). The storage drive can be removed, and when a new
storage drive is inserted, the contents are automatically rebuilt from the rest of the array with no
need to reconfigure the RAID parameters. If the replaced storage drive was configured as a hotspare, the new HDD is automatically configured as a new hot-spare.
For information about the implementation of RAID on this server, refer to “Configuring Server
Drives for OS Installation” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
72
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
Removing and Replacing an HDD or SSD Storage
Drive
The following sections describe how to remove and replace an HDD or SSD storage drive.
■
■
“Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
“Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78
Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
1.
Prepare the system for the drive removal.
Refer to “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
2.
Identify the location of the drive that you want to remove.
The following illustrations show the location of the drives and the internal system software
designations for the drives. For information on storage drive status indicators (LEDs), refer to
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32.
FIGURE 12
Drive Location and Numbering on a Server With Eight 2.5-Inch Drives
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
5
6
Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 0)
Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 1)
Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 2)
Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD/NVMe 3)
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
73
Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
7
8
9
Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
Optional SATA DVD drive
FIGURE 13
Drive Location and Numbering on a Server With Twelve 3.5-Inch Drives
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
74
Storage drive 0 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 4 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 8 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 1 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 5 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 9 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 2 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 6 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 10 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 3 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 7 (HDD/SSD)
Storage drive 11 (HDD/SSD)
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
FIGURE 14
Drive Location and Numbering on a Server With Twenty-Four 2.5-Inch Drives
Figure Legend
1
2
3.
Storage drives 0 through 11 (HDD/SSD; Storage drives 3 and 4: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
Storage drives 12 through 23 (HDD/SSD; Storage drives 19 and 20: HDD/SSD/NVMe)
If you are removing an HDD or SSD storage drive, type the required operating
system commands to stop the server from using the drive; otherwise, proceed to
the next step.
The exact commands required depend on the configuration of your drives. Unmount file
systems, or issue RAID commands as needed.
Note - The blue OK to Remove status indicator LED on the drive may or may not light, as
support for this varies depending on the operating system in use.
4.
On the drive you plan to remove, push the latch release button to open the drive
latch [1, 2].
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
75
Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
FIGURE 15
Opening the Drive Latch
Figure Legend
1
2
Pressing the latch release button.
Opening the latch.
Caution - The latch is not an ejector. Do not open the latch too far to the right. Doing so can
damage the latch.
5.
76
Grasp the latch and pull the drive out of the drive slot.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
FIGURE 16
6.
Removing a Storage Drive
Consider your next steps:
■
■
If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Install an HDD or SSD Storage
Drive” on page 78.
If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 226.
Related Information
■
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 72
“Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 72
“Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78
■
“Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 88
■
■
■
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
77
Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive
1.
Remove the replacement drive from its packaging, and place the drive on an
antistatic mat.
2.
If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.
3.
Align the replacement drive with the drive slot.
The drive is physically addressed according to the slot in which it is installed. It is important to
install a replacement drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed.
4.
Slide the drive into the slot until the drive is fully seated.
FIGURE 17
Installing a Storage Drive
5.
Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.
6.
Perform administrative procedures to reconfigure the drive.
The procedures that you perform at this point depend on how your data is configured. You
might need to partition the drive, create file systems, load data from backups, or have the drive
updated from a RAID configuration.
78
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 72
“Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 72
“Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
“Remove a Rear Storage Drive” on page 86
Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive
Using Oracle Solaris
Note - NVMe storage drives are supported only on servers that are running Oracle Solaris or
Oracle Linux operating systems. Servers that are running Oracle VM, Windows Server, Red
Hat Enterprise Linux, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, or VMware ESXi do not support NVMe
drives.
The following sections describe how to remove and replace an NVMe storage drive on a server
that is running the Oracle Solaris operating system.
■
■
■
■
■
“Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 79
“Remove an NVMe Storage Drive From the Server” on page 80
“Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 80
“Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server” on page 81
“Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver” on page 81
Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive
1.
Log in to Oracle Solaris that is running on the server.
2.
To find the NVMe drive slot number, type:
# hotplug list –lc
This command produces output similar to the following for each of the NVMe drives installed
in the server:
# hotplug list –lc
Connection State
Description
Path
-----------------------------------------------------------------pcie13
ENABLED PCIe-Native /[email protected],0/pci8086,[email protected]/pci111d,[email protected]
3.
To prepare the NVMe drive for removal, that is, detach the device driver and
power off the drive slot, type the following commands:
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
79
Remove an NVMe Storage Drive From the Server
# hotplug poweroff pcie13
# hotplug list –lc
The following output appears for the NVMe drive that has been unmounted:
# hotplug list –lc
Connection State
Description
Path
-----------------------------------------------------------------pcie13
PRESENT PCIe-Native /[email protected],0/pci8086,[email protected]/pci111d,[email protected]
4.
Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe storage drive is lit.
Remove an NVMe Storage Drive From the Server
Perform this procedure to physically remove an NVMe storage drive from the server.
1.
Identify the physical location of the NVMe drive that you want to remove.
For storage drive locations, see “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73.
2.
Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe storage drive is lit.
3.
On the drive you plan to remove, push the latch release button to open the drive
latch.
See Figure 15.
4.
Grasp the latch and pull the drive out of the drive slot.
5.
Consider your next steps:
■
■
If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Verify Removal of an NVMe
Storage Drive” on page 80, and then “Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the
Server” on page 81.
If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 226.
Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive
To verify that the NVMe drive has been removed, type:
# hotplug list –lc
The following output appears for the NVMe drive that you removed:
80
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server
# hotplug list –lc
Connection State
Description
Path
-----------------------------------------------------------------pcie13
EMPTY
PCIe-Native /[email protected],0/pci8086,[email protected]/pci111d,[email protected]
Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server
Perform this procedure to physically install an NVMe storage drive into the server.
Note - After you physically remove an NVMe storage drive from the server, wait at least 10
seconds before installing a replacement drive.
1.
Remove the replacement drive from its packaging and place the drive on an
antistatic mat.
2.
If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.
3.
Align the replacement drive with the drive slot.
The drive is physically addressed according to the slot in which it is installed. It is important to
install a replacement drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed.
4.
Slide the drive into the slot until the drive is fully seated.
See Figure 17.
5.
Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.
Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver
1.
Type: # hotplug enable pcie13
2.
Type: # hotplug list –lc
The following status is displayed for the NVMe storage drive.
# hotplug list –lc
Connection State
Description
Path
-----------------------------------------------------------------pcie13
Enabled PCIe-Native /[email protected],0/pci8086,[email protected]/pci111d,[email protected]
3.
To check the NVMe drive health, firmware level, temperature, get error log,
SMART data, security erase, low level format, etc., type:
# nvmeadm list
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
81
Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 72
“Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 72
“Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
“Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78
Removing and Replacing an NVMe Storage Drive
Using Oracle Linux
Note - NVMe storage drives are supported only on servers that are running Oracle Solaris or
Oracle Linux operating systems. Servers that are running Oracle VM, Windows Server, Red
Hat Enterprise Linux, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, or VMware ESXi do not support NVMe
drives.
The following sections describe how to remove and replace an NVMe storage drive on a server
that is running the Oracle Linux operating system.
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 82
“Remove an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 84
“Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 84
“Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server” on page 85
“Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver” on page 85
“Verify Operation of an NVMe Storage Drive” on page 85
Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive
1.
Log in to Oracle Linux that is running on the server.
2.
Remove the NVMe storage device path.
a.
To find the PCIe addresses (Bus Device Function), type:
# find /sys/devices |egrep ‘nvme[0-9][0-9]?$’
This commands returns output similar to the following:
/sys/devices/pci0000:80/0000:80:03.0/0000:b0:00.0/0000:b1:04.0/0000:b2:00.0/misc/nvme0
/sys/devices/pci0000:80/0000:80:03.0/0000:b0:00.0/0000:b1:05.0/0000:b4:00.0/misc/nvme1
In the above listing, the PCIe addresses are highlighted in bold text.
82
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Unmount an NVMe Storage Drive
b.
To obtain the slot number (APIC ID) for the bus address, type the following
command to list all of the PCIe slot numbers and the corresponding bus
addresses:
# egrep –H ‘.*’ /sys/bus/pci/slots/*/address
This commands returns output similar to the following:
/sys/bus/pci/slots/10/address:0000:b8:00
/sys/bus/pci/slots/11/address:0000:b6:00
/sys/bus/pci/slots/12/address:0000:b2:00 (instance nvme0, pcie slot 12, drive label
nvme2)
/sys/bus/pci/slots/13/address:0000:b4:00 (instance nvme1, pcie slot 13, drive label
nvme3)
In the above output, the bus addresses for the corresponding NVMe instances are
highlighted in bold text.
Note - In the above output, notice that the instance names for the NVMe drives does not
correspond to the NVMe drive labels on the front of the server, that is, pci/slots/12/address:
0000:b2:00 corresponds to instance nvme0; however, on the front of the server, this drive is
labeled NVMe2. For a table that shows the relationship between the pci/slot# and the NVMe
storage drive label on the front of the server, see “Server Operating System Names for the
NVMe Storage Drives” on page 45.
c.
Disconnect all users of the NVMe drive and back up the NVMe drive data as
needed.
i.
Use the umount command to unmount any file systems that are mounted
on the device.
ii.
Remove the device from any multiple device (md) and Logical Volume
Manager (LVM) volume using it.
If the device is a member of an LVM Volume group, then it may be necessary
to move data off the device using the pvmove command, then use the vgreduce
command to remove the physical volume, and (optionally) pvremove to remove the
LVM meta data from the disk.
iii.
If the device uses multipathing, run multipath -l and note all the paths
to the device. Then, remove the multipathed device using the multipath
-f device command.
iv.
Run the blockdev --flushbufs device command to flush any outstanding
I/O to all paths to the device.
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
83
Remove an NVMe Storage Drive
3.
To prepare the NVMe drive for removal, that is, detach the NVMe device driver
and power off the NVMe drive slot, type:
# echo 0 > /sys/bus/pci/slots/$slot/power
Where $slot is the slot number obtained in step Step 2.b above.
4.
Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe drive is lit.
Remove an NVMe Storage Drive
Perform this procedure to physically remove an NVMe storage drive from the server.
1.
Identify the location of the NVMe drive that you want to remove.
For storage drive locations, see “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73.
2.
Verify that the OK to Remove indicator (LED) on the NVMe drive is lit.
3.
On the NVMe drive you plan to remove, push the latch release button to open the
drive latch.
See Figure 15.
4.
Grasp the latch and pull the drive out of the drive slot.
5.
Consider your next steps:
■
■
If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Verify Removal of an NVMe
Storage Drive” on page 84, and then “Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the
Server” on page 85.
If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 226.
Verify Removal of an NVMe Storage Drive
1.
To check the NVMe drive enumeration so as to verify that NVMe drive has been
removed, type:
# lspci -nnd :0953
2.
View the command output and verify that the entry for the slot number that was
disabled no longer appears.
This commands returns output similar to the following:
84
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server
b2:00.0 Non-Volatile memory controller [0108]: Intel Corporation Device [8086:0953] (rev 01)
b6:00.0 Non-Volatile memory controller [0108]: Intel Corporation Device [8086:0953] (rev 01)
b8:00.0 Non-Volatile memory controller [0108]: Intel Corporation Device [8086:0953] (rev 01)
Install an NVMe Storage Drive in the Server
Perform this procedure to physically install an NVMe storage drive into the server.
Note - After you physically remove an NVMe drive from the server, wait at least 10 seconds
before installing a replacement drive.
1.
Remove the replacement drive from its packaging and place the drive on an
antistatic mat.
2.
If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.
3.
Align the replacement drive with the drive slot.
The drive is physically addressed according to the slot in which it is installed. It is important to
install a replacement drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed.
4.
Slide the drive into the slot until the drive is fully seated.
See Figure 17.
5.
Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.
Power On an NVMe Storage Drive and Attach a Device Driver
To power on the slot and attach the device driver, type:
# echo 1 /sys/bus/pci/slots/$slot/power
Where $slot is the slot number for the NVMe storage drive.
Verify Operation of an NVMe Storage Drive
To verify that an NVMe drive is operating properly, do one of the following:
■
■
Check the /var/log/messages log file.
Type: ls -l /dev/nvme*.
Related Information
■
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
85
Remove a Rear Storage Drive
■
■
■
■
“Storage Drives Hot-Plug Conditions” on page 72
“Storage Drive Failure and RAID” on page 72
“Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
“Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78
Removing and Replacing a Rear Storage Drive
The following sections describe how to remove and replace a rear storage drive.
■
■
“Remove a Rear Storage Drive” on page 86
“Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 88
Remove a Rear Storage Drive
Note - Rear storage drives are supported in the twelve 3.5-inch storage drive and twenty-four
2.5-inch storage drive configurations only. Rear storage drives are not supported in the eight
2.5-inch storage drive configuration.
1.
Prepare the system for the drive removal.
Refer to “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
2.
Identify the rear storage drive you want to remove.
For specific storage drive locations, see “Rear Panel Components and Cable
Connections” on page 18. For information on storage drive status indicators (LEDs), refer to
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32.
3.
Type the operating system commands required to stop the server from using the
drive.
The exact commands required depend on the configuration of your drives. Unmount file
systems, or issue RAID commands as needed.
Note - The blue OK to Remove status indicator LED on the drive may or may not light, as
support for this varies depending on the operating system in use.
4.
Remove the rear storage drive.
a.
86
On the storage drive that you want to remove, push the drive release button
to open the latch [1].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a Rear Storage Drive
b.
Grasp the drive latch, and pull the drive out of the drive slot [2].
Caution - The drive latch is not an ejector. Do not open the latch too far to the right. Doing so
can damage the latch.
FIGURE 18
5.
Removing a Rear-Mounted Storage Drive
Consider your next steps:
■
■
If you are replacing the drive, continue to “Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 88.
If you are not replacing the drive, install a filler panel in the empty drive slot to maintain
proper airflow and perform administrative tasks to configure the server to operate without
the drive.
For information on how to install a storage drive filler panel, see “Remove and Install Filler
Panels” on page 226.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
87
Install a Rear Storage Drive
Install a Rear Storage Drive
Note - Rear storage drives are supported in the twelve 3.5-inch storage drive and twenty-four
2.5-inch storage drive configurations only. Rear storage drives are not supported in the eight
2.5-inch storage drive configuration.
1.
If necessary, remove the drive filler panel.
2.
Determine the drive slot location for the replacement drive.
If you removed an existing drive from a slot in the system, you must install the replacement
drive in the same slot as the drive that was removed. Drives are physically addressed
according to the slot in which they are installed. See “Rear Panel Components and Cable
Connections” on page 18 for boot drive locations.
3.
Slide the drive into the drive slot until it is fully seated.
FIGURE 19
88
Installing a Rear-Mounted Storage Drive
4.
Close the drive latch to lock the drive in place.
5.
Perform administrative procedures to reconfigure the drive.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)
The procedures that you perform at this point depend on how your data is configured. You
might need to partition the drive, create file systems, load data from backups, or have the drive
updated from a RAID configuration.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Storage and Boot Drive Indicators” on page 32
“Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78
Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)
The fan modules are located in the front of the server. See the following procedures:
■
■
“Remove a Fan Module” on page 89
“Install a Fan Module” on page 92
Related Information
■
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
Remove a Fan Module
You do not have to power off the server to service fan modules.
You should not begin this procedure unless you have a replacement fan module and you are
ready to install it right away.
1.
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
2.
To access the fan modules, open the top cover fan assembly door.
Caution - Close the top cover fan assembly door within 60 seconds to maintain adequate
airflow to properly cool the server. Leaving the door open for more than 60 seconds, while the
server is running, might cause the server to automatically shut down.
3.
Identify the faulty fan module.
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
89
Remove a Fan Module
Each fan module has a fan status indicator (LED) that is located next to the module. If the LED
is amber, the fan has failed. The location of the fan status LED is shown in the following figure.
FIGURE 20
Fan Module Locations and Fan Status Indicators
LED Color and State Meaning
Amber – The fan module is faulty. The front Top Fan LED and the front and rear panel Service Required LEDs are
also lit if the system detects a fan module fault.
4.
90
Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screw that secures the
faulty fan module in the chassis [1].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a Fan Module
FIGURE 21
5.
Removing a Fan Module
Grasp both the captive screw and the opposite end of the module and lift the fan
module straight up and out of the chassis, and set it aside on an antistatic mat
[2].
Caution - When removing a fan module, do not rock it back and forth. Rocking the fan module
can cause damage to the motherboard connectors.
Caution - Do not service any other components in the fan compartment unless the system is
shut down and the power cords are removed.
6.
Consider your next step:
■
■
If you removed the fan assembly as part of another procedure, return to that procedure.
Otherwise, continue to “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
91
Install a Fan Module
Related Information
■
“Install a Fan Module” on page 92
Install a Fan Module
1.
Remove the replacement fan module from its packaging, and place it on an
antistatic mat.
2.
With the top cover fan assembly door open, install the replacement fan module
into the server [1].
The fan modules are keyed to ensure that they are installed in the correct orientation.
FIGURE 22
92
Installing a Fan Module
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)
3.
Press down on the fan module and apply firm pressure to fully seat the fan
module.
4.
Verify that the fan module status indicator (LED) on the replacement fan module
is not illuminated.
5.
Using your thumb and forefinger, tighten the captive screw to secure the fan
module to the chassis. Then use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw
an additional 1/4 turn to secure the fan module to the chassis [2].
6.
Close the top cover fan assembly door.
7.
Verify that the Top Fan Fault LED on the front of the server and the Service
Required LEDs on the front and rear of the server are extinguished.
See “Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31 for more information about identifying
and interpreting system status indicators.
8.
Consider your next step:
■
■
If you installed the fan module as part of another procedure, return to that procedure.
Otherwise, return the server to operation. See “Returning the Server to Operation”.
Related Information
■
“Remove a Fan Module” on page 89
Servicing Power Supplies (CRU)
The server's redundant power supplies support concurrent maintenance, which enables you to
remove and replace a power supply without shutting down the server, provided that the other
power supply is online and working.
The server supports model A258 (1000 watt) power supplies. The A258 power supply unit
(PSU) provides conversion from the AC lines to the system, accepting ranges from 100-240
volts AC (VAC). These PSUs are designed to be hot-swappable, and in most cases will provide
fully redundant “1+1” power, allowing the system to suffer the loss of a PSU or an AC feed
with no loss to system availability.
In maximally configured systems, it is possible that the worst-case power consumption of the
system could exceed the capacity of a single PSU. The PSUs provide an over-subscription
mode, which allows the system to operate with fault-tolerance even with modest excursions
beyond the rated capacity of a single PSU. This over-subscription support is accomplished
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
93
Remove a Power Supply
using hardware signaling between the PSU and motherboard circuitry, which can force the
system to throttle CPU and memory power in the event that a PSU is lost. The resulting power
savings will be enough to allow the system to continue to run (in a lower-performance state)
until the power problem is resolved.
The following status indicators (LEDs) are lit when a power supply fault is detected:
■
■
■
Front and rear Service Required LEDs
Amber Service Required LED on the faulty power supply
Rear Power Supply Fault LED located on the server front panel
If a power supply fails and you do not have a replacement available, leave the failed power
supply installed to ensure proper airflow in the server. For more information, refer to the
following topic and procedures:
■
■
■
“Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 33
“Remove a Power Supply” on page 94
“Install a Power Supply” on page 97
Related Information
■
■
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
“Powering Down the Server” on page 55
Remove a Power Supply
1.
Prepare the system for power supply removal.
Refer to “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
2.
94
Identify which power supply requires replacement.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a Power Supply
FIGURE 23
Power Supplies and Latches Locations
Figure Legend
1
2
Power supply 0
Power supply 1
A lit amber Service Required LED on a power supply indicates that a failure was detected.
You can also use the Oracle ILOM show faulty command at the Oracle ILOM command-line
prompt (->) to identify a power supply failure.
Alternatively, to list all known faults in the server, log into the Oracle Solaris OS and issue
the fmadm faulty command, or log into the Oracle ILOM service processor from the Oracle
ILOM Fault Management Shell and issue the fmadm faulty command. For more information
about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and supported commands, see the
Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and Diagnostics Firmware Release 3.2.x in
the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Note - The fans of a failed power supply might still be spinning when the system is powered on.
The fans will stop spinning when you disconnect the power cords.
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
95
Remove a Power Supply
3.
Gain access to the rear of the server where the faulty power supply is located.
4.
If the cable management arm (CMA) is installed, disconnect both CMA left-side
connectors and move the CMA out of the way.
For instructions for disconnecting the CMA left-side connectors, refer to “Remove the Cable
Management Arm” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
Caution - When disconnecting the CMA left-side connectors, be sure to use your arm to
support the CMA so that it does not hang down under its own weight and stress the right-side
connectors; otherwise, the CMA might be damaged. You must continue to support the CMA
until you have reconnected both of the left-side connectors.
5.
Disconnect the power cord from the faulty power supply.
6.
Grasp the power supply handle and push the power supply latch to the left [1].
FIGURE 24
7.
Removing a Power Supply
Pull the power supply out of the chassis [2].
Caution - Whenever you remove a power supply, you should replace it with another power
supply; otherwise, the server might overheat due to improper airflow.
8.
96
Continue to “Install a Power Supply” on page 97.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a Power Supply
Related Information
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 33
“Install a Power Supply” on page 97
Install a Power Supply
Caution - Always replace the failed power supply with the same type model of power supply.
1.
Remove the replacement power supply from its packaging, and place it on an
antistatic mat.
2.
Align the replacement power supply with the empty power supply slot.
3.
Slide the power supply into the slot until it is fully seated.
You will hear an audible click when the power supply fully seats.
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
97
Install a Power Supply
FIGURE 25
Installing a Power Supply
4.
Reconnect the power cord to the power supply.
5.
Verify that the amber Service Required LED on the replaced power supply and
the Service Required LEDs are not lit on the front and rear panels.
Note - After you have replaced Power Supply 0, you might need to reset the Oracle ILOM
service processor (SP) to propagate the key identity properties (KIP) data to the new power
supply. For instructions on resetting the SP, see the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager
(ILOM) 3.2 Configuration and Maintenance Guide at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/
docs. Power Supply 1 does not contain KIP data, and therefore does not require an SP reset
after replacement.
6.
If you disconnected the two CMA left-side connectors, reconnect the
connectors.
For instructions for reconnecting the CMA left-side connectors, refer to “Install the Cable
Management Arm” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
98
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a Power Supply
Related Information
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Power Supply Status Indicators” on page 33
“Remove a Power Supply” on page 94
Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off
99
100
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
These sections describe how to service customer-replaceable units (CRUs) that require
you to power off the server. For more information about CRUs, see “Illustrated Parts
Breakdown” on page 19 and “Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 21.
Description
Links
Service the DIMMs.
“Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 101
Service the PCIe cards.
“Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)” on page 115
Service the internal USB flash drives.
“Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives
(CRU)” on page 121
Service the battery.
“Servicing the Battery (CRU)” on page 126
Related Information
■
■
“Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing FRUs”
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
The Oracle Server X5-2L supports a variety of DDR4 DIMM configurations that can include
quad-rank (QR), dual-rank (DR), and single-rank (SR) DDR4 DIMMs.
Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Electrostatic Discharge
Safety” on page 52.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
DIMMs, or damage to the DIMMs might occur. You must disconnect all power cables from the
system before performing these procedures.
The following topics and procedures provide information to assist you when replacing a DIMM
or upgrading DIMMs:
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
101
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“DIMM and Processor Physical Layout” on page 102
“DIMM Population Scenarios” on page 103
“DIMM Population Rules” on page 104
“Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 104
“DIMM Operating Speeds” on page 108
“DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 108
“Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators and the BIOS Isolation of Faulty
DIMMs” on page 108
“Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 108
“Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 109
“Install a DIMM” on page 113
Related Information
■
“Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 129
DIMM and Processor Physical Layout
The physical layout of the DIMMs and processor(s) is shown in the following figure. When
viewing the server from the front, processor 0 (P0) is on the left. Notice that each processor, P0
and P1, have four memory channels that are labeled, from left to right, Ch C, Ch D, Ch B, and
Ch A.
102
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
FIGURE 26
DIMM and Processor Physical Layout
Note - In single-processor systems, the DIMM sockets associated with processor 1 (P1) are
nonfunctional and should not be populated with DIMMs.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
“DIMM Population Scenarios” on page 103
“DIMM Population Rules” on page 104
“Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 104
“DIMM Operating Speeds” on page 108
“DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 108
“Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators and the BIOS Isolation of Faulty
DIMMs” on page 108
DIMM Population Scenarios
There are two scenarios in which you are required to populate DIMMs:
■
A DIMM fails and needs to be replaced.
In this scenario, you can use the Fault Remind button to determine the failed DIMM, then
remove the failed DIMM and replace it. To ensure that system performance is maintained,
you must replace the failed DIMM with a DIMM of the same size (in gigabytes) and type
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
103
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
■
(quad-rank, dual-rank, or single-rank). In this scenario, you should not change the DIMM
configuration.
You have purchased new DIMMs and you want to use them to upgrade the server's memory.
In this scenario, you should adhere to DIMM population rules and follow the recommended
DIMM population order for optimal system performance.
Related information
■
■
■
■
■
“DIMM Population Rules” on page 104
“Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 104
“Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 108
“Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 109
“Install a DIMM” on page 113
DIMM Population Rules
The population rules for adding DIMMs to the server are as follows:
■
■
■
■
■
The server supports 32-GB quad-rank (QR) Load-Reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs) and 8-GB
single-rank (SR) and 16-GB dual-rank (DR) Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs).
Do not mix 32-GB LRDIMMs and 8-GB or 16-GB RDIMMs in the same server. If the
server has 32-GB LRDIMMs installed, you cannot install 8-GB or 16-GB RDIMMs and
vice versa.
Within a memory channel, DIMMs must be populated in the black sockets first, then in the
black sockets with white tabs, and then in the white sockets.
If you are installing a mix of RDIMM sizes (for example, 8-GB and 16-GB), install the
larger size RDIMMs first, then the smaller RDIMMs, until all of the RDIMMs are installed.
There are no restrictions on the minimum number of DIMM sockets that must be populated.
The server will operate properly with one DIMM installed.
Populating DIMMs for Optimal System
Performance
Optimal performance is achieved by populating the DIMMs so that the memory is symmetrical,
or balanced. Symmetry is achieved by adhering to the following guidelines:
■
■
104
In single-processor systems, populate DIMMs of the same size in multiples of four.
In dual-processor systems, populate DIMMs of the same size in multiples of eight.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
■
Populate the DIMM sockets in the order described in the following sections.
The following sections provide an example of how to populate the DIMM sockets to achieve
optimal system performance.
Note - Not all possible configurations are shown here.
■
■
“Populating DIMMs in Single-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance” on page 105
“Populating DIMMs in Dual-Processor Systems for Optimal System
Performance” on page 106
Populating DIMMs in Single-Processor Systems
for Optimal System Performance
In single-processor systems, install DIMMs only into DIMM sockets associated with processor
0 (P0). Starting with socket P0 D0, first filling the black sockets, then the black sockets with
white tabs, and then the white sockets, as shown in the following figure. Notice that the order
of populating the black sockets is Ch C first, Ch A second, Ch D third, and Ch B last. Repeat
the same population sequence for the black sockets with white tabs, and finally for the white
sockets.
FIGURE 27
DIMM Population Order for Single-Processor Systems
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
105
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
The following table describes the proper order in which to populate DIMMs in a singleprocessor system using the numbered callouts in the above figure, the memory channel labels
(Ch A through Ch D), and the DIMM socket labels (D0 through D11).
TABLE 8
DIMM Population Order for Single-Processor Systems
Population Order
DIMMs Sockets for Processor 0 (P0)
Memory Channels
First
D0
Ch C
Second
D11
Ch A
Third
D3
Ch D
Fourth
D8
Ch B
Fill the black sockets first
Then fill the black sockets with white tabs
Fifth
D1
Ch C
Sixth
D10
Ch A
Seventh
D4
Ch D
Eighth
D7
Ch B
Ninth
D2
Ch C
Tenth
D9
Ch A
Eleventh
D5
Ch D
Twelfth
D6
Ch B
Then fill the white sockets
Populating DIMMs in Dual-Processor Systems for
Optimal System Performance
In dual-processor systems, populate DIMMs into DIMM sockets starting with processor 0 (P0)
D0, then, alternating between sockets associated with processor 0 (P0) and matching sockets
for processor 1 (P1). Fill the black sockets, then the black sockets with white tabs, and finally,
the white sockets, as shown in the following figure. Notice that the order of populating the
black DIMM sockets is Ch C first, Ch A second, Ch D third, and Ch B last. Repeat the same
population sequence for the black sockets with white tabs, and finally, for the white sockets.
106
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
FIGURE 28
DIMM Population Order for Dual-Processor Systems
The following table describes the proper order in which to install DIMMs in a dual-processor
system using the numbered callouts in the above figure, the memory channel labels (Ch A
through Ch D), and the DIMM socket labels (D0 through D11).
TABLE 9
DIMM Population Order for Dual-Processor Systems
Population Order
DIMM Sockets for Processor
0 (P0)
DIMM Sockets for Processor
1 (P1)
Memory Channels
Fill the black sockets first (alternating between processor 0 and processor 1)
First
Fill D0 first
Then fill D0
Ch C
Second
Fill D11 first
Then fill D11
Ch A
Third
Fill D3 first
Then fill D3
Ch D
Fourth
Fill D8 first
Then fill D8
Ch B
Then fill the black sockets with white tabs (alternating between processor 0 and processor 1)
Fifth
Fill D1 first
Then fill D1
Ch C
Sixth
Fill D10 first
Then fill D10
Ch A
Seventh
Fill D4 first
Then fill D4
Ch D
Eighth
Fill D7 first
Then fill D7
Ch B
Then fill the white sockets (alternating between processor 0 and processor 1)
Ninth
Fill D2 first
Then fill D2
Ch C
Tenth
Fill D9 first
Then fill D9
Ch A
Eleventh
Fill D5 first
Then fill D5
Ch D
Twelfth
Fill D6 first
Then fill D6
Ch B
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
107
Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)
DIMM Operating Speeds
The maximum supported memory speed is 2133 MT/s. However, not all system configurations
will support operation at this speed. The maximum attainable memory speed will be limited
by the maximum speed supported by the specific type of processor and the specific memory
population. All memory installed in the system will operate at the same speed, or frequency.
DIMM Rank Classification Labels
DIMMs come in a variety of ranks: single, dual, or quad. Each DIMM is shipped with a label
identifying its rank classification. The following table identifies the label corresponding to each
DIMM rank classification:
TABLE 10
DIMM Rank Classification Labels
Rank Classification
Label
Quad-rank LRDIMM
4Rx4
Dual-rank RDIMM
2Rx4
Single-rank RDIMM
1Rx4
Inconsistencies Between DIMM Fault Indicators
and the BIOS Isolation of Faulty DIMMs
When a single DIMM is marked as failed by Oracle ILOM (for example, fault.memory.
intel.dimm.training-failed is listed in the service processor Event Log), BIOS might
disable the entire memory channel that contains the failed DIMM, up to three DIMMs. As a
result, none of the memory installed in the disabled channel will be available to the operating
system. However, when the Fault Remind button is pressed, only the fault status indicator
(LED) associated with the failed DIMM lights. The fault LEDs for the other DIMMs in the
memory channel remain off. Therefore, you can correctly identify the failed DIMM using the lit
LED.
Using the Server Fault Remind Button
When the server Fault Remind button is pressed, an LED located next to the Fault Remind
button lights green to indicate that there is sufficient voltage present in the fault remind circuit
to light any fault LEDs that were lit due to a component failure. If this LED does not light when
108
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM
you press the Fault Remind button, it is likely that the capacitor powering the fault remind
circuit has lost its charge. This can happen if the Fault Remind button is pressed for several
minutes with fault LEDs lit or if power has been removed from the server for more than 15
minutes.
The following figure shows the location of the Fault Remind button.
FIGURE 29
Fault Remind Button Location
Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server, and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
109
Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
2.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to DIMMs.
Identify and note the location of the faulty DDR4 DIMM by pressing the Fault
Remind button on the motherboard I/O card.
See “Using the Server Fault Remind Button” on page 108.
Faulty DIMMs are identified with a corresponding amber LED on the motherboard.
■
■
110
If the DIMM fault LED is off, then the DIMM is operating properly.
If the DIMM fault LED is on (amber), then the DIMM is faulty and should be replaced [1].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM
FIGURE 30
3.
Identifying a Faulty DIMM
To remove the faulty DIMM, do the following:
a.
Rotate both DIMM socket ejectors outward as far as they will go.
The DIMM is partially ejected from the socket. See Figure Figure 31.
b.
Carefully lift the DIMM straight up to remove it from the socket.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
111
Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM
FIGURE 31
4.
Removing a DIMM
Replace each faulty DIMM with either another DIMM of the same rank size (quadrank, dual-rank, or single-rank) or leave the socket empty.
For DIMM replacement instructions, see “Install a DIMM” on page 113.
Related Information
■
“DIMM and Processor Physical Layout” on page 102
“DIMM Population Rules” on page 104
“Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 104
“DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 108
■
“Install a DIMM” on page 113
■
■
■
112
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a DIMM
Install a DIMM
1.
Unpack the replacement DDR4 DIMM and place it on an antistatic mat.
2.
Ensure that the replacement DDR4 DIMM matches the size of the DIMM it is
replacing.
You must not replace a single-rank or dual-rank DIMM with a quad-rank DIMM and vice versa.
If you violate this rule, the performance of the server might be adversely affected. For DIMM
socket population rules, see “DIMM Population Rules” on page 104.
3.
Install a DIMM.
a.
Ensure that the ejector tabs are in the open position.
b.
Align the notch in the replacement DIMM with the connector key in the
connector socket.
The notch ensures that the DIMM is oriented correctly.
c.
Push the DDR4 DIMM into the connector socket until the ejector tabs lock
the DIMM in place.
If the DIMM does not easily seat into the connector socket, verify that the notch in the
DIMM is aligned with the connector key in the connector socket. If the notch is not
aligned, damage to the DIMM might occur.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
113
Install a DIMM
FIGURE 32
Installing a DIMM
4.
Repeat Step 3 until all replacement DIMMs are installed.
5.
Return the server to operation:
a.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
b.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
c.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
d.
114
Reconnect the power cords and data cables to the server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233.
e.
Power on the server.
See “Power On the Server” on page 233.
Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
6.
(Optional) Use Oracle ILOM to clear server DDR4 DIMM faults.
DDR4 DIMM faults are automatically cleared after a new DIMM has been installed. If you
need to manually clear DDR4 DIMM faults, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager
(ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Note - If you want to move a faulty DDR4 DIMM to a new DIMM socket or re-seat a DIMM
for troubleshooting, you must first manually clear the associated DIMM fault. Otherwise, the
DIMM fault might follow the DIMM to the new socket location or reoccur on the current socket
location, causing a false DIMM fault condition.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
“DIMM and Processor Physical Layout” on page 102
“DIMM Population Rules” on page 104
“Populating DIMMs for Optimal System Performance” on page 104
“DIMM Rank Classification Labels” on page 108
“Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 109
Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)
These sections describe how to service and install PCIe cards. Refer to your PCIe card
documentation for complete software and cabling information about your card.
Caution - The procedures in this section should not be used to service the Oracle Storage 12
Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card that is located in PCIe slot 6 or the optional Oracle PCIe
NVMe switch card that is located in PCIe slot 3. The Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA card and Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card are field replaceable units (FRUs) and should be
serviced only by qualified Oracle Service personnel.
Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 64.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
115
Servicing PCIe Cards (CRU)
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
PCIe cards. You must disconnect all power cables from the system before performing these
procedures.
Note - For a complete list of supported PCIe cards, refer to the Oracle Server X5-2L Product
Notes at http://www.oracle.com/goto/X5-2L/docs.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
■
“PCIe Slot Locations” on page 116
“Remove a PCIe Card” on page 117
“Install a PCIe Card” on page 119
Related Information
■
“Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card (FRU)” on page 180
PCIe Slot Locations
There are six PCIe slots available for optional PCIe cards. The following figure shows the PCIe
slot numbering.
FIGURE 33
PCIe Slot Locations
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
116
PCIe slot 1 (PCIe slot 1 is nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
PCIe slot 2 (PCIe slot 2 is nonfunctional in single-processor systems.)
PCIe slot 3 (PCIe slot 3 is nonfunctional in single-processor systems. Primary slot for the optional Oracle PCIe
NVMe switch card)
PCIe slot 4
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a PCIe Card
5
6
PCIe slot 5
PCIe slot 6 (Primary slot for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card)
Note - All of the PCIe slots comply with the PCI Express 3.0 specification and can
accommodate 25 Watt PCIe3 cards.
Related Information
■
■
“Remove a PCIe Card” on page 117
“Install a PCIe Card” on page 119
Remove a PCIe Card
Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.
Note - Prior to replacing or installing a PCIe card, refer to the card documentation for specific
installation and cabling instructions.
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
2.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to PCIe cards.
Locate the PCIe card that you want to remove.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
117
Remove a PCIe Card
See “PCIe Slot Locations” on page 116.
3.
If necessary, record where the PCIe cards are installed.
4.
Unplug all data cables from the PCIe card [1].
Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.
5.
Rotate the PCIe card locking mechanism [1], and then lift up on the PCIe card to
disengage it from the motherboard connectors [2].
FIGURE 34
118
Removing the PCIe Card
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a PCIe Card
6.
Place the PCIe card on an antistatic mat.
Caution - If you are not immediately inserting a replacement PCIe card into the empty slot,
insert a PCIe filler panel in the slot to reduce the possibility of radiated electromagnetic
interference (EMI). For instructions for installing a PCIe filler panel, see “Remove and Install
Filler Panels” on page 226.
Related Information
■
■
“PCIe Slot Locations” on page 116
“Install a PCIe Card” on page 119
Install a PCIe Card
Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.
1.
Unpack the replacement PCIe card, and place it on an antistatic mat.
2.
Locate the proper PCIe slot for the card you are replacing.
Note - PCIe slot 3 is the primary slot for the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card. This card is
required for controlling and managing the optional NVMe storage drives.
3.
If necessary, remove the PCIe filler panel from the slot.
Note - Save this filler panel in case you need to remove the PCIe card from the system.
4.
Insert the PCIe card into the correct slot [1], and rotate the PCIe locking
mechanism to secure the PCIe card in place [2].
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
119
Install a PCIe Card
FIGURE 35
120
Installing a PCIe Card
5.
Reconnect the cables to the PCIe card that you unplugged during the removal
procedure [2].
6.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
b.
Install the top cover.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives (CRU)
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
c.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
d.
Connect any required data cables to the PCIe card.
Route data cables through the cable management arm.
e.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the AC OK LED is lit.
7.
Use Oracle ILOM to clear any server PCIe card faults.
If a PCIe card fault message in Oracle ILOM is not cleared under Open Problems, you
must manually clear the fault in Oracle ILOM. For instructions for manually clearing a
PCIe card fault, see the procedure "Clear Faults for Undetected Replaced or Repaired
Hardware Components" in the Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and
Diagnostics Firmware Release 3.2.x in the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2
Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
8.
To determine wheather additional steps are required to complete the installation
of the PCIe card, refer to the server product notes for the type of PCIe card you
installed.
For a complete listing of the PCIe host bus adapter (HBA) cards supported by the server, refer
to the Oracle Server X5-2L Product Notes at http://www.oracle.com/goto/X5-2L/docs.
Related Information
■
■
“PCIe Slot Locations” on page 116
“Remove a PCIe Card” on page 117
Servicing the Internal USB Flash Drives (CRU)
Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive
to electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the component to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 64.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
121
Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing a
flash drive or damage to the drive might occur. You must disconnect all power cables from the
system before performing these procedures.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
■
“Servicing the Oracle System Assistant USB Flash Drive” on page 122
“Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 122
“Install an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 124
Related Information
■
“USB Ports” on page 240
Servicing the Oracle System Assistant USB Flash
Drive
If the Oracle System Assistant software is corrupted on the USB flash drive, you should try to
repair it before replacing the USB flash drive.
Oracle System Assistant uses a specially formated USB flash drive. Do not replace the Oracle
System Assistant flash drive with a standard flash drive. If the Oracle System Assistant USB
flash drive fails and it cannot be repaired by reloading the Oracle System Assistant software,
contact Oracle Services and request a service call to have Oracle System Assistant USB flash
drive replaced.
Note - If your server is configured with Oracle System Assistant software, it is located on the
USB flash drive in the bottom USB slot.
For instructions for troubleshooting and repairing Oracle System Assistant, refer to the Oracle
System Assistant troubleshooting information in the Oracle X5 Series Servers Administration
Guide at http://www.oracle.com/goto/x86AdminDiag/docs.
Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive
The server can be equipped with up to two internal USB Flash drives.
1.
122
Prepare the server for service.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
2.
To remove a USB flash drive, grasp the flash drive and pull it from the slot.
Note - If your server is configued with Oracle System Assistant software, it is located on the
USB flash drive in the bottom USB slot. Before removing the Oracle System Assistant USB
flash drive, see “Servicing the Oracle System Assistant USB Flash Drive” on page 122.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
123
Install an Internal USB Flash Drive
FIGURE 36
Removing a USB Flash Drive
Related Information
■
“Install an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 124
Install an Internal USB Flash Drive
1.
Unpack the replacement USB flash drive.
2.
Insert the flash drive into the USB slot.
Note - If you are replacing the Oracle System Assistant USB flash drive, insert the USB flash
drive into the bottom USB slot.
124
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install an Internal USB Flash Drive
FIGURE 37
3.
Installing a USB Flash Drive
Return the server to operation.
a.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
b.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
c.
Reconnect the power cords to the server power supplies and power on the
server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
125
Servicing the Battery (CRU)
4.
If the USB flash drive that you replaced was the Oracle System Assistant USB
flash drive, you need to reinstall Oracle System Assistant on the new USB flash
drive.
For instructions, see the procedures for restoring Oracle System Assistant in the Oracle X5
Series Servers Administration Guide at http://www.oracle.com/goto/x86AdminDiag/docs.
Related Information
■
“Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 122
Servicing the Battery (CRU)
The real-time clock (RTC) battery maintains system time when the server is powered off and
a time server is unavailable. If the server fails to maintain the proper time when the system is
powered off and not connected to a network, replace the battery.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
the battery. You must disconnect the power cables from the system before performing this
procedure.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
“Remove the Battery” on page 126
“Install the Battery” on page 128
Remove the Battery
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
126
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Battery
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
2.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the battery.
To dislodge the battery from its retainer, gently push the top edge of the battery
away from the retainer.
FIGURE 38
3.
Removing the System Battery
Lift the battery up and out of its retainer.
Related Information
■
“Install the Battery” on page 128
Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off
127
Install the Battery
Install the Battery
1.
Unpack the replacement battery.
2.
Press the new battery into the battery retainer with the positive side (+) facing
inside the server chassis.
3.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
b.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
c.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
d.
Reconnect the power cords to the server power supplies, and power on the
server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Note - If the service processor is configured to synchronize with a network time server using
the Network Time Protocol (NTP), the Oracle ILOM SP clock will be reset as soon as the
server is powered on and connected to the network; otherwise, proceed to the next step.
4.
If the service processor is not configured to use NTP, you must do one of the
following:
■
Reset the Oracle ILOM SP clock using the Oracle ILOM CLI or the web interface.
■
For instructions, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2
Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Use the BIOS Setup Utility to reprogram the host clock.
For the BIOS Main menu that supports this procedure, refer to the Oracle X5 Series Servers
Administration Guide at http://www.oracle.com/goto/x86AdminDiag/docs.
Related Information
■
128
“Remove the Battery” on page 126
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing FRUs
The following sections describe how to service field-replaceable units (FRUs). You must power
down the system and remove the AC power cords before servicing all FRU components. For
more information about FRUs, see “Illustrated Parts Breakdown” on page 19 and “FieldReplaceable Units” on page 22.
Note - Only authorized Oracle service personnel should service FRUs.
Description
Links
Service the processors.
“Servicing Processors (FRU)” on page 129
Service the front and rear storage drive backplanes.
“Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes
(FRU)” on page 146
Service SAS cables.
“Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 167
Service NVMe cables.
“Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 174
Service the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA card and super capacitor.
“Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA Card (FRU)” on page 180
Service the DVD drive.
“Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)” on page 187
Service the front indicator LED/USB modules.
“Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules
(FRU)” on page 193
Service the motherboard assembly.
“Servicing the Motherboard Assembly
(FRU)” on page 209
Related Information
■
■
“Servicing CRUs That Do Not Require Server Power-Off”
“Servicing CRUs That Require Server Power-Off”
Servicing Processors (FRU)
Caution - Processors should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.
Servicing FRUs
129
Servicing Processors (FRU)
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing a
processor. You must disconnect the power cables from the system before performing these
procedures.
Caution - This procedure requires that you handle components that are sensitive to electrostatic
discharge. This sensitivity can cause the component to fail. To avoid damage, ensure that
you follow electrostatic discharge safety measures and antistatic practices. See “Electrostatic
Discharge Safety” on page 52.
Note - On single-processor systems, neither a heatsink nor a processor filler cover are installed
in the processor socket 1 (P1). To protect the delicate processor socket pins, the cover that
comes on the motherboard from manufacturing is left in place.
This section covers the following topics:
■
■
■
“Selecting the Correct Processor Removal and Replacement Tool” on page 130
“Remove a Processor” on page 134
“Install a Processor” on page 140
Related Information
■
“Servicing the DIMMs (CRU)” on page 101
Selecting the Correct Processor Removal and
Replacement Tool
Caution - The correct color-coded processor removal and replacement tool must be used
to remove and replace a processor; otherwise, the processor or the processor socket might
be damaged. Additionally, do not use a tool that is designed for earlier generations of Intel
processors (CPUs). If you use an earlier generation tool, the processor will only be partially
held by the tool and it could fall from the tool, which could damage the processor socket.
Selecting the correct processor removal and replacement tool is a two-step process. First you
determine the size of the processor that is being replaced, then you select the removal and
replacement tool that fits that size.
The processors supported by the Oracle Server X5-2L are available in two sizes. The processors
with 10 or fewer cores are smaller than the processors with 12 or more cores. You can
determine the size of the processor that you are going to remove and replace in either of these
two ways:
■
130
Use Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 to display processor information.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing Processors (FRU)
■
For instructions, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2
Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Visually check the size of the processor installed in the server.
This requires that you remove the processor heatsink and open the processor independent
loading mechanism (ILM) assembly that holds the processor in the socket. For instructions,
see “Remove a Processor” on page 134. This is the same procedure that you will use
when you remove the processor.
If you choose to visually check the size of the processor, refer to the next two figures to see
how to distinguish the smaller processors from the larger processors. Figure 39 shows the
smaller processor installed. Notice that the right and left edges of the processor are within the
boundaries of the processor alignment brackets.
FIGURE 39
Smaller Processor Installed in a Motherboard Processor Socket
Figure Legend
1
2
Processor alignment brackets
Processor left and right edges are within alignment bracket boundaries
Servicing FRUs
131
Servicing Processors (FRU)
Figure 40 shows the larger processor installed. Notice that the right and left edges of the
processor extend beyond the boundaries of the processor alignment brackets.
FIGURE 40
Larger Processor Installed in a Motherboard Processor Socket
Figure Legend
1
2
Processor alignment brackets
Processor left and right edges extend beyond alignment bracket boundaries
After you have determined the size of the processor installed in your server, select the correct
processor removal and replacement tool. Like the processors, the processor removal and
replacement tool is also available in two sizes. The tool for the smaller processors (processors
with 10 or fewer cores) is color-coded green. The tool for the larger processors (processors with
12 or more cores) is color-coded pink. See Figure 41.
132
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing Processors (FRU)
FIGURE 41
Color-Coded Processor Removal and Replacement Tool
Figure Legend
1
2
Green, color-coded removal and replacement tool for the smaller processor models E5-2630 V3 (8-core) and E52660 V3 (10-core)
Pink, color-coded removal and replacement tool for the larger processor models E5-2690 V3 (12-core) and E52699 V3 (18-core)
Caution - The pink color-coded processor removal and replacement tool must be used only
with the larger processors (the 12-, and 18-core processors). Likewise, the green color-coded
removal and replacement tool must be used only with smaller processors (the 8-, and 10-core
processors); otherwise, the processor or the processor socket might be damaged.
The following table provides an easy reference for matching a processor (by number of cores or
model number) to the correct processor removal and replacement tool. The processor removal
and replacement tool part number is also recorded on the tool.
TABLE 11
Processor Model Numbers by Number of Cores
Processor Cores
Processor Model Number
Processor Removal and
Replacement Tool Color Code and
Part Number
8-core
E5-2630 V3
10-core
E5-2660 V3
Green, part number G29477-002 or
later
12-core
E5-2690 V3
18-core
E5-2699 V3
Pink, part number G54233-001 or
later
Note - The correct processor removal and replacement tool is included in the box with the
replacement processor. Additionally, both removal and replacement tools ship with replacement
motherboards.
Servicing FRUs
133
Remove a Processor
Remove a Processor
Caution - The correct color-coded processor removal and replacement tool must be used to
remove a processor; otherwise, the processor or the processor socket might be damaged. For
information on how to select the correct processor removal/replacement tool, see “Selecting the
Correct Processor Removal and Replacement Tool” on page 130.
Caution - Be careful not to touch the processor socket pins. The processor socket pins are
very fragile. A light touch can bend the processor socket pins beyond repair. Always use the
processor removal and replacement tool to remove and replace the processor.
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
c.
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
2.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the
processors.
Identify the location of the faulty processor by pressing the Fault Remind button
on the motherboard I/O card.
Note - When the Fault Remind button is pressed, an LED located next to the Fault Remind
button lights green to indicate that there is sufficient voltage present in the fault remind circuit
to light any fault LEDs that were lit due to a failure. If this LED fails to light when you press
the Fault Remind button, it is likely that the capacitor powering the fault remind circuit has
lost its charge. This can happen if the Fault Remind button is pressed for a long time with fault
LEDs lit or if power has been removed from the server for more than 15 minutes.
134
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a Processor
The processor fault LED for the faulty processor lights. The processor fault LEDs are located
next to the processors:
■
■
If the processor fault LED is off, then the processor is operating properly.
If the processor fault LED is on (amber), then the processor is faulty and should be replaced.
FIGURE 42
Identifying Faulty Processors
Figure Legend
1
2
3
4
3.
Fault Remind button
Fault Remind LED
Processor 0 fault LED
Processor 1 fault LED
Gently press down on the top of the heatsink to counteract the pressure of the
captive spring-loaded screws that secure the heatsink to the motherboard and
Servicing FRUs
135
Remove a Processor
loosen the four Phillips captive screws in the heatsink using a No. 2 Phillips
screwdriver [2].
Turn the screws counterclockwise alternately one and one-half turns until they are fully
released.
FIGURE 43
4.
136
Removing a Heatsink and Opening the Processor Release Levers
To separate the heatsink from the top of the processor, gently twist the heatsink
left and right, while pulling upward, and then lift off the heatsink and place it
upside down on a flat surface.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a Processor
A thin layer of thermal grease separates the heatsink and the processor. This grease acts as an
adhesive.
Note - Do not allow the thermal grease to contaminate the work space or other components.
5.
Use an alcohol pad to clean the thermal grease from the underside of the
heatsink.
Be careful not to get the thermal grease on your fingers.
Caution - Failure to clean the heatsink prior to removing the processor could result in the
accidental contamination of the processor socket or other components. Also, be careful not to
get the grease on your fingers, as this could result in contamination of components.
6.
Disengage the processor release lever on the right side of the processor socket
(viewing the server from the front) by pushing down on the lever and moving it
to the side away from the processor, and then rotating the lever upward [3].
7.
Disengage the processor release lever on the left side of the processor socket
(viewing the server from the front) by pushing down on the lever and moving it
to the side away from the processor, and then rotating the lever upward [3].
8.
To lift the ILM assembly load plate off of the processor socket, rotate the
processor release lever on the right side of the processor toward the closed
position (the ILM assembly load plate is lifted up as the release lever is lowered
toward the closed position) and carefully swing the ILM load plate to the fully
open position [4].
Caution - Whenever you remove a processor, you should replace it with another processor and
reinstall the processor heatsink; otherwise, the server might overheat due to improper airflow.
For instructions for installing a processor, see “Install a Processor” on page 140.
9.
To remove the processor from the processor socket, acquire the processor
removal and replacement tool and perform the following steps.
Caution - Before removing the processor, ensure that you are using the correct color-coded
processor removal and replacement tool. For information on how to select the correct processor
removal and replacement tool, see “Selecting the Correct Processor Removal and Replacement
Tool” on page 130.
a.
Locate the button in the center of the top of the processor removal tool and
press it to the down position [1].
Servicing FRUs
137
Remove a Processor
b.
Properly position the tool over the processor socket and lower it into place
over the processor socket [2].
To properly position the tool over the processor socket, rotate the tool until the green
triangle on the side of the tool is facing the front of the server and it is over the left side of
the processor socket when viewing the server from the front.
c.
Press the release lever on the processor tool to release the center button
and engage the processor [3].
An audible click indicates that the processor is engaged.
d.
Grasp the tool by the sides and remove it from the server [4].
e.
Turn the tool upside down and verify that it contains the processor [5].
f.
While holding the processor tool upside down, press the center button on
the tool to release the processor [5].
g.
Carefully grasp the processor by the front and back edges, lift it out of the
tool and place it with the circuit side down (the installed orientation) into an
antistatic container [6].
h.
Carefully clean the thermal grease off the top of the processor.
Caution - The following figure shows the green color-coded processor removal and
replacement tool. If you are removing a processor with 12 or more cores, you must use the
pink color-coded processor removal and replacement tool. For information on how to select the
correct processor removal and replacement tool, see “Selecting the Correct Processor Removal
and Replacement Tool” on page 130.
138
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove a Processor
FIGURE 44
Removing a Processor
Related Information
■
“Install a Processor” on page 140
Servicing FRUs
139
Install a Processor
Install a Processor
Caution - The correct color-coded processor removal and replacement tool must be used to
install a processor; otherwise, the processor or the processor socket might be damaged. For
information on how to select the correct processor removal and replacement tool, see “Selecting
the Correct Processor Removal and Replacement Tool” on page 130.
Caution - Be careful not to touch the processor socket pins. The processor socket pins are
very fragile. A light touch can bend the processor socket pins beyond repair. Always use the
processor removal and replacement tool to remove and replace the processor.
1.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
2.
Unpack the replacement processor, and place it on an antistatic mat.
3.
Ensure that the replacement processor is identical to the failed processor that
was removed.
For a description of the processors that are supported by the server, refer to “Server
Components” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
4.
Ensure that the two processor ILM assembly levers and the ILM assembly load
plate are in the fully open position.
For instructions for opening the processor ILM assembly levers and the load plate, see Step 6
through Step 8 of “Remove a Processor” on page 134.
5.
To install the replacement processor into the processor removal and
replacement tool, acquire the tool and perform the following steps.
Caution - Before installing the processor, ensure that you are using the correct color-coded
processor removal and replacement tool. For information on how to select the correct processor
removal and replacement tool, see “Selecting the Correct Processor Removal and Replacement
Tool” on page 130.
140
a.
Press the button in the center of the tool to the down position [1].
b.
Turn the tool upside down, grasp the processor by its front and back edges
and position the processor (circuit side up) in the tool so that the triangle
on the corner of the processor aligns with the triangle on the side of the
processor removal and replacement tool [2].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a Processor
c.
Lower the processor into the tool and press the tool release lever to release
the center button and engage the processor [3].
An audible click indicates that the processor is locked into place.
d.
Properly position the tool over the processor socket and lower it into place
[4].
To properly position the tool in the processor socket, rotate the tool until the green triangle
on the side of the tool is facing the front of the server and it is over the left side of the
processor socket (when viewing the server from the front) and lower the tool into the
processor socket.
e.
Press the center button on the tool down to release the processor so that it
is installed in the socket [5].
f.
Remove the processor removal and replacement tool [6].
Caution - The following figure shows the green color-coded processor removal and
replacement tool. If you are installing a processor with 12 or more cores, you must use the pink
color-coded processor removal and replacement tool. For information on how to select the
correct processor removal and replacement tool, see “Selecting the Correct Processor Removal
and Replacement Tool” on page 130.
Servicing FRUs
141
Install a Processor
FIGURE 45
6.
Installing a Processor
Visually check the alignment of the processor in the socket [1].
When properly aligned, the processor sits flat in the processor socket.
142
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a Processor
Caution - Do not press down on the processor. Irreparable damage to the processor or
motherboard might occur from excessive downward pressure. Do not forcibly seat the processor
into the socket. Excessive downward pressure might damage the socket pins.
7.
Swing the processor ILM assembly load plate into the closed position [2].
Ensure that the load plate sits flat around the periphery of the processor.
FIGURE 46
Closing the Processor Release Levers and Installing a Heatsink
Servicing FRUs
143
Install a Processor
8.
Engage the socket release lever on the left side of the socket (viewing the server
from the front) by rotating it downward and slipping it under the catch [3].
9.
Engage the socket release lever on the right side of the socket (viewing the
server from the front) by rotating it downward and slipping it under the catch [3].
10.
Use the syringe (supplied with the new or replacement processor) to apply
approximately 0.1 mL of thermal grease to the center of the top of the processor.
To measure 0.1 ml of thermal grease, use the graduated scale on the thermal grease syringe.
Note - Do not distribute the grease; the pressure of the heatsink will do it for you when you
install the heatsink.
11.
Inspect the heatsink for dust and lint.
Clean the heatsink if necessary.
12.
Orient the heatsink so that the screws line up with the mounting posts [4].
Note - The processor heatsink is not symmetrical.
13.
Carefully position the heatsink on the processor, aligning it with the mounting
posts to reduce movement after it makes initial contact with the layer of thermal
grease [4].
Caution - Avoid moving the heatsink after it has contacted the top of the processor. Too much
movement could disturb the layer of thermal grease, causing voids, and leading to ineffective
heat dissipation and component damage.
14.
Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws alternately one-half turns
until fully seated [4].
15.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
b.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
c.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
d.
144
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install a Processor
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
16.
Use Oracle ILOM to clear server processor faults.
Refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at
http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs for more information about the following steps.
a.
To show server faults, log in to the server as root using the Oracle ILOM CLI,
and type the following command to list all known faults on the server:
-> show /SP/faultmgmt
The server lists all known faults, for example:
-> show /SP/faultmgmt
Targets:
shell
0 (/SYS/MB/P0)
Properties:
Commands:
cd
show
Alternatively, to list all known faults in the server, log into the Oracle Solaris OS and
issue the fmadm faulty command, or log into the Oracle ILOM service processor from
the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and issue the fmadm faulty command. For
more information about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and
supported commands, see the Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and
Diagnostics Firmware Release 3.2.x in the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM)
3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
b.
To clear the fault identified in Step 16a, type the following command:
-> set /SYS/MB/P0 clear_fault_action=true
For example:
-> set /SYS/MB/P0 clear_fault_action=true
Are you sure you want to clear /SYS/MB/P0 (y/n)? y
Set ‘clear_fault_action’ to ‘true’
Alternatively, to clear all known faults in the server, log into the Oracle Solaris OS and
issue the fmadm repair command, or log into the Oracle ILOM service processor from
the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and issue the fmadm repair command. For
more information about how to use the Oracle ILOM Fault Management Shell and
supported commands, see the Oracle ILOM User's Guide for System Monitoring and
Diagnostics Firmware Release 3.2.x in the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM)
3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Servicing FRUs
145
Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)
Related Information
■
“Remove a Processor” on page 134
Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes
(FRU)
Caution - Front and rear storage drive backplanes should be removed and replaced only by
authorized Oracle Service personnel.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
the storage drive backplane. You must disconnect the power cables before performing this
procedure.
To remove and install the front and rear storage drive backplanes, follow these procedures:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 146
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 149
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 152
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 155
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 158
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 160
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 162
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 165
Related Information
■
■
■
“Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)” on page 71
“Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 167
“Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 174
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for EightDrive Systems
1.
146
Prepare the server for service.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
c.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
d.
Remove the disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
e.
If necessary, remove the fan modules from the server.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
2.
Pull each storage drive out far enough to disengage if from the disk backplane.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73.
Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply
pull them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the
storage drives from the server, record their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.
3.
Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane.
a.
Disconnect the two SAS cables from the storage drive backplane to the
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [1].
Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.
Servicing FRUs
147
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
FIGURE 47
148
Removing the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
b.
Disconnect the power cable from the storage drive backplane [2].
c.
If present, disconnect the two optional NVMe cables from the storage drive
backplane [2].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
d.
If the server has a DVD drive, disconnect the power and DVD data
connections from the storage drive backplane [3].
See “Remove the DVD Drive” on page 188.
e.
Disconnect the auxiliary signal cable from the storage drive backplane [4]
4.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the right-side spring-mounted screw
that secures the storage drive backplane to the chassis [4].
5.
Lift up on the left-side spring tab, and then gently release the storage drive
backplane from the standoff hooks and out from under the spring tab [5].
6.
Pull the storage drive backplane away from the standoff hooks and spring tab
and out of the chassis [6].
7.
Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.
Related Information
■
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 149
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive
Systems
1.
Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and then position it under the
left-side spring tab to engage the standoff hooks. [1 and 2].
Servicing FRUs
149
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
FIGURE 48
2.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the right-side springmounted screw to secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [3].
3.
Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane.
a.
150
Installing the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
Reconnect the auxiliary signal cable to the storage drive backplane [3].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems
Note - Cable part number 7064127 is required to connect the auxiliary signal to the storage
drive backplane.
b.
If the server has a DVD drive, reconnect the power and DVD data
connections to the storage drive backplane [4].
See “Install the DVD Drive” on page 190.
Note - Cable part number 7064128 is required to connect DVD power and data to the storage
drive backplane.
c.
Reconnect the power cable to the storage drive backplane [5].
Note - Cable part number 7064125 is required to connect power to the storage drive backplane.
d.
If present, reconnect the two optional NVMe cables to the storage drive
backplane [5].
To ensure proper NVMe cable connections, see “Install NVMe Cables” on page 177.
e.
Reconnect the two SAS cables to the storage drive backplane from the
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [6].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 171.
4.
Return the server to operation.
a.
If removed, install the fan modules.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
b.
Install the disk cage cover, and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
c.
Install all storage drives into the storage cage.
See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78.
d.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
e.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
Servicing FRUs
151
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Note - IMPORTANT: When the disk backplane is replaced, the key identity properties (KIP)
of the disk backplane is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same KIP as the other
quorum member components. If you have removed other quorum member components,
you might need to manually program the product serial number (PSN) into the new disk
backplane. For more information, refer to “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 53.
Related Information
■
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Eight-Drive Systems” on page 146
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for TwelveDrive Systems
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
d.
Open the server fan assembly door, and remove the fan modules from the
server.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
e.
Remove the fan assembly door from the server.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
2.
Pull each storage drive out far enough to disengage if from the disk backplane.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73.
152
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply pull
them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the storage
drives from the server, make a note of their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.
3.
Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane.
a.
Disconnect the SAS cable from the storage drive backplane to the rearmounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables from the storage drive
backplane to the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [1].
Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.
Servicing FRUs
153
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
FIGURE 49
4.
154
Removing the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
b.
Disconnect the auxiliary signal cable from the storage drive backplane [2].
c.
Disconnect the power cable from the storage drive backplane [3].
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the right-side spring-mounted screw
that secures the storage drive backplane to the chassis [4].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
5.
Lift the storage drive backplane up to release it from the standoff hooks and out
of the chassis [5].
6.
Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.
Related Information
■
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 155
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for TwelveDrive Systems
1.
Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and position it to engage the
standoff hooks [1].
Servicing FRUs
155
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
FIGURE 50
2.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the right-side springmounted screw to secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [2].
3.
Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane.
a.
156
Installing the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
Reconnect the power cable to the storage drive backplane [3].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems
Note - Cable part number 7086654 is required to connect power to the storage drive backplane.
b.
Reconnect the auxiliary signal cable to the storage drive backplane [4].
Note - Cable part number 7079291 is required to connect the auxiliary signal to the storage
drive backplane.
c.
Reconnect the SAS cable to the storage drive backplane from the rearmounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables to the storage drive
backplane from the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [5].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 171.
4.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Install the fan assembly door top cover.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
b.
Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
c.
Install all storage drives into the storage drive cage.
See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78.
d.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
e.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Note - IMPORTANT: When the disk backplane is replaced, the key identity properties (KIP)
of the disk backplane is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same KIP as the other
quorum member components. If you have removed other quorum member components,
you might need to manually program the product serial number (PSN) into the new disk
backplane. For more information, refer to “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 53.
Servicing FRUs
157
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems
Related Information
■
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twelve-Drive Systems” on page 152
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for TwentyFour Drive Systems
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
d.
Open the server fan assembly door, and remove the fan modules from the
server.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
e.
Remove the fan assembly door from the server.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
2.
Pull each storage drive out far enough to disengage it from the disk backplane.
See “Remove an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 73.
Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply pull
them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the storage
drives from the server, make a note of their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.
3.
Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane.
a.
158
Disconnect the two power cables and the auxiliary signal cable from the
storage drive backplane [1].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems
FIGURE 51
Removing the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems
b.
If present, disconnect the two optional NVMe cables from the storage drive
backplane [2].
c.
Disconnect the SAS cable from the storage drive backplane to the rearmounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables from the storage drive
backplane to the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [3].
Note the cable connections in order to ease proper reconnection of the cables.
4.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two spring-mounted screws that
secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [4].
5.
Lift the storage drive backplane up to release it from the standoff hooks [4].
Servicing FRUs
159
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems
6.
Pull the storage drive backplane away from the standoff hooks and out of the
chassis.
7.
Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.
Related Information
■
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 160
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for TwentyFour Drive Systems
1.
Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and position it to engage the
standoff hooks [1].
FIGURE 52
160
Installing the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems
2.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the two spring-mounted
screws to secure the storage drive backplane to the chassis [1].
3.
Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane.
4.
a.
Reconnect the SAS cable to the storage drive backplane from the rearmounted storage drives, and the two SAS cables to the storage drive
backplane from the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA [2].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 171.
b.
If present, reconnect the two optional NVMe cables to the storage drive
backplane [3].
To ensure proper NVMe cable connections, see “Install NVMe Cables” on page 177.
c.
Reconnect the two power cables and the auxiliary signal cable to the
storage drive backplane [4].
Use the following cable part number table to ensure proper cable connections.
Cable Part Number
Description
7079291
Auxiliary signal cable
7064125
Power cable, right
7086654
Power cable, center
Return the server to operation.
a.
Install the fan assembly door top cover.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
b.
Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
c.
Install all storage drives into the storage drive cage.
See “Install an HDD or SSD Storage Drive” on page 78.
d.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
e.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Servicing FRUs
161
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
Note - IMPORTANT: When the disk backplane is replaced, the key identity properties (KIP)
of the disk backplane is programmed by Oracle ILOM to contain the same KIP as the other
quorum member components. If you have removed other quorum member components,
you might need to manually program the product serial number (PSN) into the new disk
backplane. For more information, refer to “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated
Update” on page 53.
Related Information
■
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Twenty-Four Drive Systems” on page 158
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for RearMounted Storage Drives
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
2.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the storage
drive backplane.
Pull each rear-mounted storage drive out far enough to disengage if from the
disk backplane.
See “Remove a Rear Storage Drive” on page 86.
162
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
Note - It is not necessary to completely remove the storage drives from the server; simply pull
them out far enough to disengage them from the disk backplane. If you do remove the storage
drives from the server, make a note of their locations so that you can reinstall them in the same
locations.
3.
Disconnect the cables from the storage drive backplane [1].
a.
Disconnect the two SAS cables from the storage drive backplane.
b.
Disconnect the power cable from the storage drive backplane.
Servicing FRUs
163
Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
FIGURE 53
164
Removing the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
4.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two screws that secure the storage
drive backplane to the storage drive cage [2].
5.
Lift the storage drive backplane up to release it from the two standoff hooks [3].
6.
Pull the storage drive backplane away from the standoff hooks and out of the
chassis [4].
7.
Place the storage drive backplane on an antistatic mat.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
Related Information
■
“Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 165
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for RearMounted Storage Drives
1.
Lower the storage drive backplane into the server, and position it to engage the
two standoff hooks [1 and 2].
Servicing FRUs
165
Install the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
FIGURE 54
Installing the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives
2.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the two screws to secure
the storage drive backplane to the storage drive cage [3].
3.
Reconnect the cables to the storage drive backplane [4].
a.
Reconnect the power cable to the storage drive backplane.
Note - Cable part number 530-4037-01 is required to connect power to the rear storage drive
backplane.
166
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)
b.
Reconnect the two SAS cables to the storage drive backplane.
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 171.
4.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
b.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
c.
Install all storage drives into the storage drive cage.
See “Install a Rear Storage Drive” on page 88.
d.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
e.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Related Information
■
“Remove the Storage Drive Backplane for Rear-Mounted Storage Drives” on page 162
Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)
Caution - SAS cables should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.
Caution - The system supplies power to the cables even when the server is powered off.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the server, you must disconnect power cords before
servicing the cables.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
“Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 168
“Install SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171
Servicing FRUs
167
Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables
Related Information
“Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)” on page 71
“Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146
“Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)” on page 174
■
■
■
Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
Open the server fan assembly door and remove fan modules.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
f.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the SAS
storage drive cables.
g.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the
following:
■
If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives or
twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, remove the server's front fan assembly
door cover.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
■
168
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove
the server's disk cage cover.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
2.
Disconnect the SAS cables.
a.
(Optional) To disconnect the SAS cables between the rear storage drive
backplane and front storage drive backplane, press each latch, and then pull
out to disengage the cable from each SAS connector [1].
b.
To disconnect the SAS cables between the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS
PCIe RAID HBA card in PCIe slot 6 and the front storage drive backplane,
press each latch, and then pull out to disengage the cable from each SAS
connector [1 and 2].
See also “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
Card” on page 180.
Note - The following figure shows SAS cables being removed from the twenty-four
drive system configuration. If you are removing SAS cables from an eight-drive system
configuration, your front disk backplane SAS connector locations will be different. In addition,
the chassis mid-wall is removed in the illustration to clearly show the SAS cable connections.
Servicing FRUs
169
Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables
FIGURE 55
3.
Removing SAS Storage Drive Cables
Remove the SAS cables from the server.
Note - (Optional) SAS cable connectors do not fit through the right-side chassis mid-wall.
If you are removing SAS cables between the rear storage drive backplane and front storage
drive backplane, you first must remove the chassis mid-wall. For instructions, see Step 11 in
“Remove the Motherboard Assembly” on page 209.
170
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install SAS Storage Drive Cables
Carefully remove the SAS cable bundles from the chassis mid-wall. Be careful not to snag the
cables on the server components.
Related Information
■
■
“Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 180
“Install SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171
Install SAS Storage Drive Cables
1.
Install SAS storage drive cables.
a.
Install the SAS cables between the front storage drive backplane and the
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card in PCIe slot 6 [1].
Route the SAS cable bundle through the chassis mid-wall and along the left side of the
chassis. To ensure that the SAS cable bundle does not interfere with the air baffle, install
the SAS cable bundle under the super capacitor cable for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS
PCIe RAID HBA card along the left side of the chassis.
Note - The following figure shows SAS cables being installed in the twenty-four drive system
configuration. If you are installing SAS cables in an eight-drive system configuration, your
front disk backplane SAS connector locations will be different. In addition, the chassis mid-wall
is removed in the illustration to clearly show the SAS cable connections.
Servicing FRUs
171
Install SAS Storage Drive Cables
FIGURE 56
b.
Installing SAS Storage Drive Cables
(Optional) Install the cables between the front storage drive backplane and
the rear storage drive backplane [2].
Note - SAS cable connectors do not fit through the right-side chassis mid-wall. If you are
installing SAS cables between the rear storage drive backplane and front storage drive
backplane, you first must remove the chassis mid-wall. For instructions, see Step 3 in “Install
the Motherboard Assembly” on page 219.
172
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install SAS Storage Drive Cables
Route the SAS cable bundle through the chassis mid-wall and along the right side of the
chassis.
2.
Reconnect the SAS cables.
a.
To reconnect the SAS cables between the front storage drive backplane and
the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card, plug each cable into
its SAS connector until you hear an audible click [1].
See also “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184.
Use the following table to ensure proper SAS cable connections:
System Disk
Configuration
Disk Backplane
Ports
HBA Port
Cable Part
Number
Eight storage drives
Shorter length cable
for drives 0-3
J5A1
7076125
J5A1
7091185
J5A1
7091185
Longer length cable
for drives 4-7
Twelve storage drives
J302 (Upper)
J301 (Lower)
Twenty-four storage drives
J3202 (Upper)
J3201 (Lower)
b.
(Optional) To reconnect the SAS cables between the front storage drive
backplane and the rear storage drive backplane, plug each cable into its
SAS connector until you hear an audible click [2].
In twelve and twenty-four drive systems, attach the SAS cable to connector (J300) on the
front storage drive backplane and to SAS connectors (RHDD0 and RHDD1) on the rear
storage drive backplane.
Note - Cable part number 7064129 is required for SAS connections between the front storage
drive backplane and rear storage drive backplane.
3.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the
following:
■
If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives or
twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, install the server's front fan assembly
door cover.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
Servicing FRUs
173
Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)
■
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server's disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
b.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
c.
Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
d.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
e.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
f.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Related Information
■
■
“Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184
“Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 168
Servicing NVMe Cables (FRU)
Caution - NVMe cables should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.
Caution - The system supplies power to the cables even when the server is powered off.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the server, you must disconnect power cords before
servicing the cables.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
174
“Remove NVMe Cables” on page 175
“Install NVMe Cables” on page 177
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove NVMe Cables
Related Information
“Servicing Storage Drives and Rear Drives (CRU)” on page 71
“Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146
“Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 167
■
■
■
Remove NVMe Cables
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
e.
Open the server fan assembly door and remove the fan modules.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
f.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the NVMe
cables.
g.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the
following:
■
If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives,
remove the server's front fan assembly door cover.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
■
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove
the server's disk cage cover.
Servicing FRUs
175
Remove NVMe Cables
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
2.
Disconnect the NVMe cables from the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card in slot 3 [1].
Press each latch, and then pull out to disengage the cable from each connector. See also
“Remove a PCIe Card” on page 117.
Note - The following figure shows NVMe cables being removed from the twenty-four
drive system configuration. If you are removing NVMe cables from an eight-drive system
configuration, your front disk backplane NVMe connector locations will be different.
FIGURE 57
3.
Removing NVMe Cables
Disconnect the NVMe cables from the front storage drive backplane [2].
Press each latch, and then pull out to disengage the cable from each connector.
4.
176
Remove the NVMe cables from the server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install NVMe Cables
Carefully remove the NVMe cable bundle from the chassis mid-wall. Be careful not to snag the
cables on the server components.
Related Information
■
“Install NVMe Cables” on page 177
Install NVMe Cables
1.
Install the NVMe cables between the front storage drive backplane and the
Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card in PCIe slot 3.
Route the NVMe cable bundle through the chassis mid-wall and via the cable trough between
the fan modules and processors.
2.
Reconnect the NVMe cables to the front storage drive backplane [1].
Plug each cable into its connector until you hear an audible click.
Note - The following figure shows NVMe cables being installed in the twenty-four drive
system configuration. If you are installing NVMe cables in an eight-drive system configuration,
your front disk backplane NVMe connector locations will be different.
Servicing FRUs
177
Install NVMe Cables
FIGURE 58
3.
Installing NVMe Cables
Reconnect the NVMe cables to the Oracle PCIe NVMe switch card in slot 3 [2].
Plug each cable into its connector until you hear an audible click. See also “Install a PCIe
Card” on page 119.
Use the following table to ensure proper NVMe cable connections.
Note - Each NVMe cable contains a matching label that corresponds to the port on the Oracle
PCIe NVMe switch card. For example, the NVMe cable labeled 0,1 plugs into Oracle PCIe
NVMe switch card port 0,1, and the cable labeled 2,3 plugs into Oracle PCIe NVMe switch
card port 2,3.
178
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install NVMe Cables
System Disk
Configuration
Disk Backplane
Cable Connector
Oracle PCIe NVMe
Switch Card Port
Cable Connector
Cable Part
Number
Eight storage drive
A
2,3
7089783
B
0,1
A
2,3
B
0,1
Twenty-four storage drives
4.
7089784
Return the server to operation.
a.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the
following:
■
If your server is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives,
install the server's front fan assembly door cover.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
■
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server's disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
b.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
c.
Install the fan modules and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
d.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
e.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
f.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Related Information
■
“Remove NVMe Cables” on page 175
Servicing FRUs
179
Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card (FRU)
Servicing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
Card (FRU)
These sections describe how to service and install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA card.
Caution - The Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card should be removed and
replaced only by authorized Oracle Service personnel.
Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 64.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing
PCIe cards. You must disconnect all power cables from the system before performing these
procedures.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
“Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 180
“Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184
Related Information
■
“Servicing SAS Cables (FRU)” on page 167
Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe
RAID HBA Card
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
180
Extend the server to the maintenance position.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
2.
Remove the super capacitor from the chassis.
a.
Grasp both ends of the cable connector, press in on the release latch, and
then unplug the connector [1].
The HBA super capacitor is secured to the air baffle by a recloseable fastener, which
allows it to be easily removed and replaced.
b.
To separate the HBA super capacitor from the air baffle, place your finger
under the rear of the super capacitor and lift up [2].
Place the super capacitor on an antistatic mat.
Servicing FRUs
181
Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
FIGURE 59
182
Removing the HBA Super Capacitor
3.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position to allow access to the super
capacitor cable and the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card.
4.
Rotate the PCIe card locking mechanism, and then lift up on the PCIe HBA card
to disengage it from the motherboard connectors [1].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
FIGURE 60
5.
Removing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
Disconnect the super capacitor cable and the SAS cables from the Oracle
Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card [1].
See also “Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 168.
6.
Lift and remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and super
capacitor cable from the chassis [2].
7.
Place the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and super capacitor
cable on an antistatic mat.
Servicing FRUs
183
Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
Related Information
■
“Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184
Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA Card
1.
Unpack the replacement Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and
super capacitor, and place them on an antistatic mat.
2.
Swivel the air baffle into the upright position and install the super capacitor
cable along the left sidewall of the chassis.
Install the super capacitor cable on top of the SAS cable bundle along the left sidewall of the
chassis. Otherwise, the SAS cable bundle will interfere with the air baffle.
3.
Connect the super capacitor cable to the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID
HBA, and then reconnect the SAS cables that you unplugged during the removal
procedure [1].
To ensure proper SAS cable connections, see “Install SAS Storage Drive
Cables” on page 171.
184
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
FIGURE 61
4.
Installing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
Insert the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card into PCIe slot 6, and
rotate the PCIe locking mechanism to secure the PCIe HBA card in place [2].
Note - PCIe slot 6 is the primary slot for the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
card. The card is required for controlling and managing the SAS storage drives.
5.
Install the super capacitor in the chassis.
a.
Lower the air baffle to the installed position.
b.
Apply a recloseable fastener to the underside of the super capacitor.
Servicing FRUs
185
Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card
c.
Align the recloseable fastener on the super capacitor with the recloseable
fastener on the air baffle and press down [1].
FIGURE 62
d.
6.
186
Installing the HBA Super Capacitor
Connect the super capacitor's cable [2].
Return the server to operation.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)
a.
Install the top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
b.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
c.
Connect any required data cables to the PCIe card.
Route data cables through the cable management arm.
d.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
7.
Use Oracle ILOM to clear any server PCIe card faults.
You can use the Oracle ILOM web interface or the command-line interface (CLI) to manually
clear faults. For information on how to use the Oracle ILOM web interface or the CLI to clear
server faults, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation
Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Related Information
■
“Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 180
Servicing the DVD Drive (FRU)
The DVD drive is available only on eight-drive systems. The DVD drive is accessible from the
chassis front panel and by removing the disk cage cover.
Caution - The DVD drive should be removed and replaced only by authorized Oracle Service
personnel.
Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This sensitivity can cause the components to fail. To avoid
damage, ensure that you follow antistatic practices as described in “Take Antistatic
Measures” on page 64.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing the
DVD drive or damage to the drive might occur. You must disconnect all power cables from the
system before performing these procedures.
Servicing FRUs
187
Remove the DVD Drive
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
“Remove the DVD Drive” on page 188
“Install the DVD Drive” on page 190
Related Information
■
“Servicing Fan Modules (CRU)” on page 89
Remove the DVD Drive
1.
Remove media from the drive.
2.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the server power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap.
See “Electrostatic Discharge Safety” on page 52.
d.
Remove the disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
3.
If necessary, remove fan modules 2 and 3 from the chassis.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
4.
188
Reach into the server directly behind the DVD drive, and disconnect the power
and DVD data connectors from rear of the DVD drive.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the DVD Drive
FIGURE 63
Disconnecting DVD Drive Cables and Lifting the Release Tab
5.
Lift up on the release tab on the rear of the DVD drive to disengage the drive
from chassis.
6.
Gently push the DVD forward and out of the front of the chassis.
Servicing FRUs
189
Install the DVD Drive
FIGURE 64
Removing the DVD Drive
7.
Standing in front of the chassis, grasp the DVD drive with both hands, and
continue to pull the DVD drive from the chassis until it clears the front of the
server.
8.
Place the DVD drive on an antistatic mat.
Related Information
■
“Install the DVD Drive” on page 190
Install the DVD Drive
190
1.
Gently push the replacement DVD drive into the chassis [1].
2.
Continue to push the DVD drive into the chassis until the release tab on the rear
of the drive engages the chassis with an audible click.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the DVD Drive
FIGURE 65
3.
Installing the DVD Drive
Reach into the server directly behind the DVD drive, and reconnect the power
and DVD data connectors to the rear of the DVD drive.
Note - Cable part number 7064128 is required to connect power and DVD data to the front
storage drive backplane.
Servicing FRUs
191
Install the DVD Drive
FIGURE 66
4.
Connecting DVD Drive Cables
If removed, reinstall fan modules 2 and 3 in the chassis.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
5.
Install the disk cage cover, and close the fan assembly door.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
6.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
b.
192
Reconnect the power cords to the server power supplies, and power on the
server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Related Information
■
“Remove the DVD Drive” on page 188
Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)
Caution - The front LED/USB indicator modules should be removed and replaced only by
authorized Oracle Service personnel.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing a
front LED/USB indicator module. You must disconnect the power cables before performing this
procedure.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
■
■
“Remove the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 193
“Install the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 197
“Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 201
“Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 205
Related Information
■
“Troubleshooting Using the Server Front and Rear Panel Status Indicators ” on page 30
Remove the Left LED Indicator Module
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
Servicing FRUs
193
Remove the Left LED Indicator Module
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
2.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:
■
If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twentyfour 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.
a.
Remove the server fan assembly door.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
b.
Remove the four remaining No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of
the chassis) that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.
FIGURE 67
■
Removing the Disk Cage Assembly Screws
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove the
server disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
3.
194
Remove the fan modules from the server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Left LED Indicator Module
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
4.
Disconnect all cables from the front storage drive backplane.
See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
5.
Disconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable from the motherboard [1 and 2].
FIGURE 68
6.
Removing the Disk Cage Assembly From the Server Chassis
Slide the disk cage assembly forward, and then gently lift the disk cage
assembly from the chassis [3].
Set the disk cage assembly on an anti-static mat.
7.
Remove the left LED indicator module.
Servicing FRUs
195
Remove the Left LED Indicator Module
a.
Remove the two No. 2 Phillips screws that secure the LED indicator module
to the server front panel [1].
If present, remove the capping tape that secures the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.
FIGURE 69
b.
196
Removing the Left LED Indicator Module
Remove the LED indicator module from the server front panel [2].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Left LED Indicator Module
Related Information
■
■
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Install the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 197
Install the Left LED Indicator Module
1.
Install the left LED indicator module.
a.
Push the LED indicator module and cable through the left LED housing on
the server front panel [1].
If necessary, use a piece of capping tape to secure the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.
Note - Cable part number 7064122 is required for the left LED indicator module.
Servicing FRUs
197
Install the Left LED Indicator Module
FIGURE 70
b.
2.
Installing the Left LED Indicator Module
Insert and tighten the two No. 2 Phillips screws to secure the LED indicator
module to the server front panel [2].
Gently lift the disk cage assembly and set it into the server chassis [1].
Slightly push the disk cage assembly into the server chassis to ensure that the disk cage screw
holes are correctly aligned with the server chassis.
198
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Left LED Indicator Module
FIGURE 71
Installing the Disk Cage Assembly in the Server Chassis
3.
Reconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable to the motherboard [2 and 3].
4.
Reconnect all cables to the front storage drive backplane.
See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
5.
Install the fan modules in the server.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
6.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:
Servicing FRUs
199
Install the Left LED Indicator Module
■
If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twentyfour 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.
a.
Install the four No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of the chassis)
that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.
FIGURE 72
b.
Installing the Disk Cage Assembly Screws
Install the server fan assembly door.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
■
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
7.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
b.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
c.
200
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Related Information
■
■
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Remove the Left LED Indicator Module” on page 193
Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
2.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:
■
If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twentyfour 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.
a.
Remove the server fan assembly door.
See “Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65.
b.
Remove the four remaining No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of
the chassis) that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.
Servicing FRUs
201
Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
FIGURE 73
■
Removing the Disk Cage Assembly Screws
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, remove the
server disk cage cover.
See “Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67.
3.
Remove the fan modules from the server.
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
4.
Disconnect all cables from the front storage drive backplane.
See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
5.
202
Disconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable from the motherboard [1 and 2].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
FIGURE 74
6.
Removing the Disk Cage Assembly From the Server Chassis
Slide the disk cage assembly forward, and then gently lift the disk cage
assembly from the chassis [3].
Set the disk cage assembly on an anti-static mat.
7.
Remove the right LED/USB indicator module.
a.
Remove the two No. 2 Phillips screws that secure the LED/USB indicator
module to the server front panel [1].
If present, remove the capping tape that secures the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.
Servicing FRUs
203
Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
FIGURE 75
b.
Removing the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
Remove the LED/USB indicator module from the server front panel [2].
Related Information
204
■
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
■
“Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 205
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
1.
Install the right LED/USB indicator module.
a.
Push the LED/USB indicator module and cable through the right LED
housing on the server front panel [1].
If necessary, use a piece of capping tape to secure the cable to the side of the disk cage
assembly.
Note - Cable part number 7064124 is required for the right LED/USB indicator module.
Servicing FRUs
205
Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
FIGURE 76
b.
2.
Installing the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
Insert and tighten the two No. 2 Phillips screws to secure the LED/USB
indicator module to the server front panel [2].
Gently lift the disk cage assembly and set it into the server chassis [1].
Slightly push the disk cage assembly into the server chassis to ensure that the disk cage screw
holes are correctly aligned with the server chassis.
206
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
FIGURE 77
Installing the Disk Cage Assembly in the Server Chassis
3.
Reconnect the left LED indicator module cable and the right LED/USB indicator
module cable to the motherboard [2 and 3].
4.
Reconnect all cables to the front storage drive backplane.
See the procedures for your storage drive configuration in “Servicing the Front and Rear
Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
5.
Install the fan modules in the server.
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
6.
Depending on your server's storage drive configuration, do one of the following:
Servicing FRUs
207
Install the Right LED/USB Indicator Module
■
If your server is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twentyfour 2.5-inch storage drives, perform the following procedures.
a.
Install the four No. 2 Phillips screws (two on each side of the chassis)
that secure the disk cage assembly to the server chassis.
FIGURE 78
b.
Installing the Disk Cage Assembly Screws
Install the server front fan assembly door.
See “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
■
If your server is configured with eight 2.5-inch storage drives, install the
server disk cage cover.
See “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
7.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
b.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
c.
208
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU)
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Related Information
■
■
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Remove the Right LED/USB Indicator Module” on page 201
Servicing the Motherboard Assembly (FRU)
Caution - The motherboard assembly should be removed and replaced only by authorized
Oracle Service personnel.
Caution - Ensure that all power is removed from the server before removing or installing the
motherboard. You must disconnect the power cables before performing these procedures.
Caution - These procedures require that you handle components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge. This discharge can cause server components to fail. To avoid damage,
ensure that you follow the antistatic practices as described in “Electrostatic Discharge
Safety” on page 52.
This section covers the following procedures:
■
■
“Remove the Motherboard Assembly” on page 209
“Install the Motherboard Assembly” on page 219
Related Information
■
“About System Components” on page 19
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
1.
Prepare the server for service.
a.
Power off the server and disconnect the power cords from the power
supplies.
See “Powering Down the Server” on page 55.
b.
Extend the server into the maintenance position.
Servicing FRUs
209
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
See “Extend the Server to the Maintenance Position” on page 61.
c.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area of the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
d.
Remove the server top cover.
See “Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64.
2.
Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and its associated
super capacitor.
See “Remove the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 180.
3.
Remove the air baffle.
Remove the air baffle by lifting the baffle up and out of the server.
4.
Remove the following reusable components:
Caution - During the motherboard removal procedure, it is important to label power supplies
with the slot numbers from which they were removed (PS0, PS1). This is required because the
power supplies must be reinstalled into the slots from which they were removed; otherwise, the
server key identity properties (KIP) data might be lost. When a server requires service, the KIP
is used by Oracle to verify that the warranty on the server has not expired. For more information
on KIP, see “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update” on page 53.
■
Fan modules
■
See “Remove a Fan Module” on page 89.
SAS storage drive cables
■
See “Remove SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 168.
NVMe cables (if present)
■
See “Remove NVMe Cables” on page 175.
PCIe cards
■
See “Remove a PCIe Card” on page 117.
Power supplies
See “Remove a Power Supply” on page 94.
5.
If the server has a DVD drive, disconnect the DVD drive cable from the
motherboard SATA connector.
To remove the DVD drive cable, carefully guide it through the chassis mid-wall and place it on
top of the disk cage so that it is away from the motherboard. You do not need to disconnect the
DVD drive cable from the DVD drive.
210
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
See “Remove the DVD Drive” on page 188.
6.
Disconnect the power cable from the motherboard to the rear storage drive
backplane [1].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
7.
Disconnect the ribbon cables from the left front LED indicator module and right
front LED/USB indicator module [1].
See “Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)” on page 193.
FIGURE 79
Disconnecting Cables From the Motherboard Assembly
Servicing FRUs
211
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
8.
Disconnect the auxiliary signal cable from the motherboard to the front storage
drive backplane [2].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
9.
Disconnect the power cable from the motherboard to the front storage drive
backplane [2].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
10.
Disconnect the signal cable from the server intrusion switch [2].
11.
Remove the mid-wall from the chassis.
a.
212
Using a hex/flat head screwdriver, remove the screw on each side of the
chassis that secures the mid-wall to the chassis [3].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
FIGURE 80
Removing the Chassis Mid-wall From the Server
b.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the four green captive screws that
secure the chassis mid-wall to the bottom of the chassis [4].
c.
Lift the mid-wall out of the chassis [5].
Servicing FRUs
213
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
FIGURE 81
12.
214
Removing the Motherboard Assembly
With the server in the extended maintenance position, remove the motherboard
from the server with all reusable components that populate the motherboard in
place.
a.
Carefully slide the motherboard forward, and lift it out of the chassis [6].
b.
Place the motherboard assembly on an antistatic mat, and next to the
replacement motherboard.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
13.
Remove the following reusable components from the motherboard and install
them onto the replacement motherboard.
■
DDR4 DIMMs
See “Identify and Remove a Faulty DIMM” on page 109 and “Install a
DIMM” on page 113.
Note - Install the DDR4 DIMMs only in the slots (connectors) from which they were
removed. Performing a one-to-one replacement of DIMMs significantly reduces the
possibility that DIMMs will be installed in the wrong slots. If you do not reinstall the
DIMMs in the same slots, server performance might be reduced and some DIMMs might
not be used.
■
USB flash drives
See “Remove an Internal USB Flash Drive” on page 122 and “Install an Internal USB Flash
Drive” on page 124.
14.
Remove the processors from the failed motherboard.
See “Remove a Processor” on page 134.
15.
Remove the processor socket covers from the replacement motherboard and
install the processors.
a.
Disengage the processor Independent Loading Mechanism (ILM) assembly
hinge lever on the right side of the processor socket (viewing the server
from the front) by pushing down on the lever and moving it to the side away
from the processor, and then rotating the lever upward [1].
Servicing FRUs
215
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
FIGURE 82
216
Removing the Processor Socket Cover
b.
Disengage the processor ILM assembly load lever on the left side of the
processor socket (viewing the server from the front) by pushing down
on the lever and moving it to the side away from the processor, and then
rotating the lever upward [1].
c.
To lift the processor ILM assembly load plate off of the processor socket,
rotate the ILM assembly hinge lever on the right side of the processor
toward the closed position (the load plate is lifted up as the hinge lever is
lowered) and carefully swing the load plate to the fully open position [2].
d.
Grasp the top and underside of the processor socket cover with one hand
(place your thumb against the underside of the cover), place your other
thumb against the underside of the cover, and carefully push the cover out
of the processor ILM assembly load plate [3].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
Caution - Be careful not to allow the processor socket cover to fall into the processor socket as
this could result in damage to the socket.
e.
Install a processor into the socket from which you removed the processor
socket cover.
See “Install a Processor” on page 140.
f.
16.
Repeat Step 15.a through Step 15.e to remove the second processor socket
cover from the replacement motherboard and install the second processor.
Install the processor socket covers on the faulty motherboard.
Caution - The processor socket covers must be installed on the faulty motherboard; otherwise,
damage might result to the processor sockets during handling and shipping.
Caution - Be careful not to allow the processor socket cover to fall into the processor socket as
this could result in damage to the socket.
a.
Open one of the processor ILM assemblies on the faulty motherboard [1 and
2].
Servicing FRUs
217
Remove the Motherboard Assembly
FIGURE 83
b.
218
Installing the Processor Socket Cover
Hold the processor ILM assembly load plate open with one hand and
position the processor socket cover over the top of the pressure frame so
that 1) the arrow on the processor socket cover is aligned with the arrow on
the load plate and 2) the fasteners on one side of the cover (the fasteners
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Motherboard Assembly
are located on the underside of the cover) are inside the load plate (it does
not matter which side), and use your thumb to press the other side of the
processor socket cover into the load plate. [3].
c.
Close the processor ILM assembly load plate [4 and 5].
d.
Repeat Step 16.a through Step 16.c to install the second processor socket
cover on the faulty motherboard.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“About System Components” on page 19
“Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 21
“Field-Replaceable Units” on page 22
“Install the Motherboard Assembly” on page 219
Install the Motherboard Assembly
1.
Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist, and then to a metal area on the
chassis.
See “Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64.
2.
Carefully lift and place the motherboard assembly into the chassis [1].
Tilt the motherboard to the right side to fit under the power supply assembly, level the
motherboard and place it into the server chassis, then slide it to the rear of the server to engage
the raised standoffs.
Servicing FRUs
219
Install the Motherboard Assembly
FIGURE 84
3.
220
Installing the Motherboard Assembly
Install the mid-wall into the chassis.
a.
Lift and place the mid-wall into the chassis [2].
b.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, tighten the four green captive screws that
secure the mid-wall to the bottom of the chassis [3].
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Motherboard Assembly
FIGURE 85
c.
4.
Securing the Chassis Mid-wall in the Server
Using a hex/flat head screwdriver, insert and tighten the screw on each side
of the chassis to secure the mid-wall in the chassis [4].
Reconnect the power cable to the motherboard from the rear storage drive
backplane [5].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
5.
Reconnect the auxiliary signal cable to the motherboard from the front storage
drive backplane [5].
Servicing FRUs
221
Install the Motherboard Assembly
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
FIGURE 86
6.
Connecting Cables to the Motherboard Assembly
Reconnect the ribbon cables from left and right LED/USB indicator modules to
the motherboard [6].
See “Servicing the Front LED/USB Indicator Modules (FRU)” on page 193.
7.
Reconnect the power cable to the motherboard from the front storage drive
backplane [6].
See “Servicing the Front and Rear Storage Drive Backplanes (FRU)” on page 146.
222
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Motherboard Assembly
8.
Reconnect the server intrusion switch cable to the motherboard [6].
9.
If the server has a DVD drive, reconnect the DVD drive cable.
To reconnect the DVD drive cable, carefully guide it through the chassis mid-wall and
reconnect it to the motherboard SATA connector.
See “Install the DVD Drive” on page 190.
10.
Reinstall the following components:
Caution - When reinstalling power supplies, it is important to reinstall them into the slots from
which they were removed during the motherboard removal procedure; otherwise, the server key
identity properties (KIP) data might be lost. When a server requires service, the KIP is used by
Oracle to verify that the warranty on the server has not expired. For more information on KIP,
see “FRU Key Identity Properties (KIP) Automated Update” on page 53.
■
Power supplies
■
See “Install a Power Supply” on page 97.
PCIe cards
■
See “Install a PCIe Card” on page 119.
NVMe cables (if present)
■
See “Install NVMe Cables” on page 177.
SAS storage drive cables
■
See “Install SAS Storage Drive Cables” on page 171.
Fan modules
See “Install a Fan Module” on page 92.
11.
Install the air baffle.
Install the air baffle by placing it into the server. Leave the air baffle in an upright position in
preparation for installing the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card.
12.
Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card and its associated
super capacitor.
See “Install the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA Card” on page 184.
13.
Return the server to operation.
a.
Install the server top cover.
See “Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226.
b.
Return the server to the normal rack position.
See “Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231.
Servicing FRUs
223
Install the Motherboard Assembly
c.
Reconnect the power cords to the power supplies, and power on the server.
See “Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233 and “Power On the
Server” on page 233. Verify that the power supply AC OK LED is lit.
Note - IMPORTANT: After replacing the motherboard, you might need to manually program
the product serial number (PSN) into the new motherboard. This is necessary because
the motherboard is a secondary member of a select group (or quorum) of components for
maintaining the PSN for service entitlement, and if you replace more than one of the quorum
members during any given service procedure, a secondary quorum member might need to be
programmed with the PSN.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
224
“About System Components” on page 19
“Customer-Replaceable Units” on page 21
“Field-Replaceable Units” on page 22
“Remove the Motherboard Assembly” on page 209
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Returning the Server to Operation
After replacing components inside of the server, perform the procedures in the following
sections.
Description
Links
Note server filler panel requirements.
“Server Filler Panel Requirements” on page 225
Install the server top cover.
“Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226
Install the fan door assembly top cover.
“Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228
Install the disk cage cover.
“Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229
Remove any antistatic measures.
“Remove Antistatic Measures” on page 230
Reinstall the server chassis in the rack.
“Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 230
Return the server to the normal rack position.
“Return the Server to the Normal Rack
Position” on page 231
Reconnect power and data cables.
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Power on the server.
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Related Information
■
“Preparing for Service”
Server Filler Panel Requirements
The server might be shipped with module-replacement filler panels for storage drives and PCIe
cards. These filler panels are installed at the factory and must remain in the server until you
replace them with a purchased option.
Before you can install an optional server component into the server, you must remove the filler
panel from the location into which you intend to install the component. When you remove
a storage drive or a PCIe card from the server, you must install either a replacement for the
component removed or a filler panel.
Returning the Server to Operation
225
Remove and Install Filler Panels
Related Information
■
“Preparing for Service”
Remove and Install Filler Panels
See the procedures in the following table to remove and install filler panels for
storage drives and PCIe cards.
Filler Panel Type
Removal Procedure
Installation Procedure
Storage drive
1. Locate the storage drive filler panel to be
removed from the server.
2. To unlatch the storage drive filler panel,
pull the release lever, and then tilt the lever
out into a fully opened position.
3. To remove the filler panel from the slot,
hold the opened release lever, and gently
slide the filler panel toward you.
1. Locate the vacant storage drive module
slot in the server, and then ensure that the
release lever on the filler panel is fully
opened.
2. Slide the filler panel into the vacant slot
by pressing the middle of the filler panel
faceplate with your thumb or finger.
1. Remove the server top cover.
2. To remove the PCIe slot filler panel, rotate
the PCIe locking mechanism, and then
lift and remove the PCIe slot filler panel
from the location into which you intend to
install the PCIe card.
1. Remove the server top cover.
2. To install the PCIe slot filler panel, press
the PCIe filler panel into the vacant PCIe
slot, and then rotate the PCIe locking
mechanism to secure the PCIe slot filler
panel.
PCIe slot
The release lever will go in as it makes
contact with the chassis. Do not slide the
filler panel in all the way. Leave the filler
panel out approximately 0.25 to 0.50 inch
(6 to 12 mm) from the opening.
3. Using your thumb or finger, press on the
middle of the filler panel faceplate until the
release lever engages with the chassis.
4. Close the release lever until it clicks into
place and is flush with the front of the
server.
Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, and 3 are nonfunctional
in single-processor systems.
Install the Server Top Cover
226
1.
Place the top cover on the chassis.
Set the cover down so that it hangs over the rear of the server by about 1 inch (25 mm) and the
side latches align with the cutouts in the chassis.
2.
Check both sides of the chassis to ensure that the top cover is fully down and
flush with the chassis.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Server Top Cover
If the cover is not fully down and flush with the chassis, slide the cover towards the rear of the
chassis to position the cover in the correct position.
Caution - If the top cover is not correctly positioned before you attempt to latch the cover, the
internal latch that is located on the underside of the cover might be damaged.
3.
Gently slide the cover toward the front of the chassis until it latches into place
(with an audible click).
As you slide the cover toward the front of the server, watch the green release button. You will
hear an audible click when the green release button pops up, indicating that the cover is locked.
FIGURE 87
Installing the Server Top Cover
Related Information
■
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
Returning the Server to Operation
227
Install the Fan Assembly Door
Install the Fan Assembly Door
Note - The procedures in this section should be used for systems configured with twelve 3.5-
inch storage drives or twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives. If your system is configured with
eight 2.5-inch drives, see “Install the Disk Cage Cover” on page 229.
1.
Place the fan assembly door on the chassis and slightly over the fan assembly.
2.
Slide the fan assembly door forward and under the lip of the forward top cover
until it latches into place [1].
FIGURE 88
3.
Installing the Fan Assembly Door
Use a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver to install and secure the fan assembly door [2].
■
If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives, install and
tighten the two screws on each side of the chassis and the three screws on
top of the chassis.
■
If your system is configured with twenty-four 2.5-inch storage drives, install
and tighten the two screws on each side of the chassis.
Related Information
■
■
228
“Remove the Fan Assembly Door From the Server” on page 65
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Install the Disk Cage Cover
Install the Disk Cage Cover
Note - The procedures in this section should be used for systems configured with eight 2.5-inch
storage drives. If your system is configured with twelve 3.5-inch storage drives or twenty-four
2.5-inch storage drives, see “Install the Fan Assembly Door” on page 228.
1.
Place the disk cage cover on the chassis [1].
FIGURE 89
Installing the Disk Cage Cover
Returning the Server to Operation
229
Remove Antistatic Measures
2.
Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, install and tighten the twelve screws (three on
each top side of the chassis, and three on each side of the chassis) to secure the
disk cage cover [2].
Related Information
■
■
■
“Remove the Server Top Cover” on page 64
“Install the Server Top Cover” on page 226
“Remove the Disk Cage Cover From the Server” on page 67
Remove Antistatic Measures
1.
Remove any antistatic straps or conductors from the server chassis.
2.
Remove the antistatic wrist strap from yourself.
Related Information
■
“Take Antistatic Measures” on page 64
Reinstall the Server in the Rack
After servicing the system, reinstall it into the rack.
Caution - Deploy any rack anti-tilt mechanism before installing the server into the rack.
Caution - The server weighs approximately 63 pounds (28.5 kg). Two people are required to
carry the chassis and install it in the rack.
230
1.
Lift the server from the antistatic mat, and reinstall the server into the rack.
Refer to “Installing the Server Into a Rack” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ” for the
installation instructions specific to your rackmount kit.
2.
If the cable management arm (CMA) is not installed, that is, you removed it
because you removed the server completely out of the rack, install the CMA.
For installation instructions for the CMA, refer to “Install the Cable Management Arm” in
“Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
3.
If the cables are disconnected from the rear of the server, that is, you
disconnected the cables because you removed the server completely out of the
rack, reconnect the cables.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position
■
For instructions on reconnecting cables to the rear of the server, see
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233.
■
For detailed information on connecting cables to the rear of the server, refer
to “Rear Cable Connections and Ports” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation
Guide ”.
Related Information
■
“Remove the Server From the Rack” on page 63
■
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position
If the server is in the extended maintenance position, use this procedure to return the server to
the normal rack position.
1.
Push the server back into the rack, as described in the following steps.
a.
Simultaneously pull and hold the two green release tabs (one on each side
of the slide rails on the server) toward the front of the server while you push
the server into the rack.
As you push the server into the rack, verify that the cable management arm (CMA) retracts
without binding.
Note - To pull the green release tab, place your finger in the center of the tab, not on the end,
and apply pressure as you pull the tab toward the front of the server.
Returning the Server to Operation
231
Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position
FIGURE 90
b.
Location of the Release Tabs on the Slide-Rails
Continue pushing the server into the rack until the slide-rail locks (on the
front of the server) engage the slide-rail assemblies.
You will hear an audible click when the server is in the normal rack position.
2.
If the CMA is not installed, that is, you removed it because you removed the
server completely out of the rack, install the CMA.
For installation instructions for the CMA, refer to “Install the Cable Management Arm” in
“Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
3.
If the cables are disconnected from the rear of the server, that is, you
disconnected the cables because you extended the server out of the rack,
reconnect the cables.
■
■
232
For instructions on reconnecting cables to the rear of the server, see “Reconnect Power and
Data Cables” on page 233.
For detailed information on connecting cables to the rear of the server, refer to “Rear Cable
Connections and Ports” in “Oracle Server X5-2L Installation Guide ”.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Reconnect Power and Data Cables
Related Information
■
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Reconnect Power and Data Cables
1.
Reconnect the data cables to the rear of the server, as appropriate.
If the cable management arm (CMA) is in the way, extend the server approximately 13 cm (5
inches) out of the front of the rack.
2.
Reconnect the power cables to the power supplies.
3.
If necessary, reinstall the cables into the cable management arm and secure
them with Velcro straps.
4.
Power on the server.
See “Power On the Server” on page 233.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reinstall the Server in the Rack” on page 230
“Return the Server to the Normal Rack Position” on page 231
“Power On the Server” on page 233
Power On the Server
As soon as the power cords are connected, standby power is applied. In standby power mode,
the Power/OK LED on the server front panel blinks steadily. Depending on the configuration of
the firmware, the system might boot. If it does not boot, follow this procedure.
Power on the server by performing one of the following actions:
■
■
■
Press the Power button on the front bezel.
Log in to the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Power On from the Select Action list.
Log in to the Oracle ILOM command-line interface (CLI), and type the following command
at the Oracle ILOM prompt:
-> start /System
Returning the Server to Operation
233
Power On the Server
When the server is powered on and the power-on self-test (POST) code checkpoint tests
have completed, the green Power/OK status indicator (LED) on the front panel of the server
lights and remains lit.
Related Information
■
■
234
“Powering Down the Server” on page 55
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Identifying the Server Ports
These sections describe the pinouts of the server connectors.
Description
Links
Review the Gigabit Ethernet ports.
“Gigabit Ethernet Ports” on page 235
Review the network management ports.
“Network Management Port” on page 236
Review the serial management ports.
“Serial Management Port” on page 237
Review the video connectors.
“Video Connector” on page 239
Review the USB ports.
“USB Ports” on page 240
Related Information
■
“About the Oracle Server X5-2L”
Gigabit Ethernet Ports
The server has four auto-negotiating 100/1000/10GBASE-T Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) system
domain ports. All four Ethernet ports use a standard RJ-45 connector. The transfer rates are
shown in the following table.
Note - Ethernet ports NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-processor systems.
TABLE 12
Ethernet Port Transfer Rates
Connection Type
IEEE Terminology
Transfer Rate
Fast Ethernet
100BASE-T
100 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet
1000BASE-T
1,000 Mbps
10 Gigabit Ethernet
10GBASE-T
10,000 Mbps
The following figure and table describe the 10-GbE port pin signals.
Identifying the Server Ports
235
Network Management Port
TABLE 13
10-GbE Port Signals
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
Transmit/Receive Data 0 +
5
Transmit/Receive Data 2 –
2
Transmit/Receive Data 0 –
6
Transmit/Receive Data 1 –
3
Transmit/Receive Data 1 +
7
Transmit/Receive Data 3 +
4
Transmit/Receive Data 2 +
8
Transmit/Receive Data 3 –
Pin
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Network Management Port
The server has one auto-negotiating 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet management domain
interface, labeled NET MGT. For information about configuring this port for managing the
server with Oracle ILOM, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2
Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
236
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Serial Management Port
Network Management Port Signals
TABLE 14
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
Transmit Data +
5
Common Mode Termination
2
Transmit Data –
6
Receive Data –
3
Receive Data +
7
Common Mode Termination
4
Common Mode Termination
8
Common Mode Termination
Pin
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Server System-Level Status Indicators” on page 31
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Serial Management Port
The serial management connector (labeled SER MGT) is an RJ-45 connector that can be
accessed from the rear panel. This port is the default connection to the server. Use this port only
for server management.
TABLE 15
Default Serial Connections for Serial Port
Parameter
Setting
Connector
SER MGT
Rate
9600 baud
Parity
None
Stop bits
1
Data bits
8
The following figure and table describe the SER MGT port pin signals.
Identifying the Server Ports
237
Serial Management Port
TABLE 16
Serial Management Port Signals
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
Request to Send
5
Ground
2
Data Terminal Ready
6
Receive Data
3
Transmit Data
7
Data Set Ready
4
Ground
8
Clear to Send
Pin
If you need to connect to the SER MGT port using a cable with either a DB-9 or a DB-25
connector, follow the pin descriptions in the tables to create a crossover adapter appropriate for
your serial connection.
TABLE 17
RJ-45 to DB-9 Adapter Crossovers Wiring Reference
Serial Port (RJ-45 Connector)
Pin
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
RTS
8
CTS
2
DTR
6
DSR
3
TXD
2
RXD
4
Signal ground
5
Signal ground
5
Signal ground
5
Signal ground
6
RXD
3
TXD
7
DSR
4
DTR
8
CTS
7
RTS
TABLE 18
238
DB-9 Adapter
RJ-45 to DB-25 Adapter Crossovers Wiring Reference
Serial Port (RJ-45 Connector)
DB-25 Adapter
Pin
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
RTS
5
CTS
2
DTR
6
DSR
3
TXD
3
RXD
4
Signal ground
7
Signal ground
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Video Connector
Serial Port (RJ-45 Connector)
DB-25 Adapter
Pin
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
5
Signal ground
7
Signal ground
6
RXD
2
TXD
7
DSR
20
DTR
8
CTS
4
RTS
Related Information
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Video Connector
The video connector is a DB-15 connector that can be accessed from the back panel.
TABLE 19
Video Connector Signals
Pin
Signal Description
Pin
Signal Description
1
Red Video
9
[KEY]
2
Green Video
10
Sync Ground
3
Blue Video
11
Monitor ID - Bit 1
4
Monitor ID - Bit 2
12
Monitor ID - Bit 0
5
Ground
13
Horizontal Sync
6
Red Ground
14
Vertical Sync
7
Green Ground
15
N/C (Reserved)
8
Blue Ground
Identifying the Server Ports
239
USB Ports
Related Information
■
■
■
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
USB Ports
The server has six USB ports for attaching supported USB 2.0–compliant devices. Two USB
ports are on the rear panel, two USB ports are on the front panel, and two USB ports are located
on the motherboard.
TABLE 20
USB Port Signals
Signal Description
Pin
1
+5 V
2
DAT-
3
DAT+
4
Ground
Related Information
■
■
■
240
“Rear Panel Components and Cable Connections” on page 18
“Disconnect Cables From the Server” on page 60
“Reconnect Power and Data Cables” on page 233
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
This section provides an overview of BIOS configuration management, Legacy BIOS, UEFI
BIOS, and the BIOS Setup Utility.
Description
Links
Learn about the tools available to manage the BIOS
configuration.
“Managing the BIOS Configuration” on page 241
Learn how to access the BIOS Setup Utility.
“Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility” on page 242
Learn about UEFI BIOS.
“Using UEFI” on page 246
Learn how BIOS allocates Option ROM and I/O
resources.
“Using BIOS for Resource Allocation” on page 248
Learn how to perform common BIOS setup
procedures.
“Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks” on page 250
Related Information
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options”
Managing the BIOS Configuration
The BIOS configuration parameters on an Oracle x86 server are manageable from the BIOS
Setup Utility and Oracle ILOM. You can also download the BIOS firmware using Oracle
System Assistant. For information about using these tools to manage the BIOS configuration,
refer to:
■
Oracle System Assistant – Oracle X5 Series Servers Administration Guide at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/x86AdminDiag/docs
■
Oracle ILOM – “Maintaining x86 BIOS Configuration Parameters” in the Oracle ILOM
Administrator's Guide for Configuration and Maintenance Firmware Release 3.2.x in the
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
BIOS Setup Utility – “Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks” on page 250
■
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
241
Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility
Related Information
■
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at: http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs
Accessing the BIOS Setup Utility
The BIOS Setup Utility provides five main menus that you can use to view product information,
and to configure, enable, and disable, or manage system components.
This section provides the following information:
■
■
■
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
“BIOS Key Mappings” on page 243
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 245
BIOS Setup Utility Menus
The following table provides descriptions for the top-level BIOS Setup Utility menus.
TABLE 21
BIOS Setup Utility Menus Summary
Menu
Description
Main
General product information, including memory, time/date, security settings, system serial
number, and CPU and DIMM information.
Advanced
Configuration information for the CPU, trusted computing, USB, and other information. Set
the IP address for the server SP.
Note - When operating in UEFI Boot Mode, Runtime UEFI driver configuration settings let
you manage PCIe drivers for all configurable devices.
Boot
Enable or disable Oracle System Assistant support, set the boot mode to Legacy BIOS or
UEFI BIOS, and configure the boot device priority.
IO
Manage configuration settings for I/O devices, such as I/O virtualization settings, and enable
and disable Option ROMs.
Save & Exit
Save changes and exit, discard changes and exit, discard changes, or restore the default BIOS
settings.
See “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options” for examples of each of these screens.
Related Information
■
242
“BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options”
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus
■
“Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 245
BIOS Key Mappings
When viewing the BIOS output from a terminal using the serial console redirection feature,
some terminals do not support function keys. BIOS supports the mapping of function keys
to Control key sequences when serial redirection is enabled. The following table provides a
description of the function key to Control key sequence mappings.
TABLE 22
Function Key to Control Key Sequence Mapping
Function Key
Control Key
Sequence
BIOS POST Function
BIOS Setup Function
F1
Ctrl+Q
Not applicable
Activate the Setup Utility Help menu.
F2
Ctrl+E
Enter BIOS Setup Utility while the
system is performing the power-on selftest (POST).
Not applicable
F7
Ctrl+D
Not applicable
Discard changes. (Not applicable to
UEFI Driver Control menu)
F8
Ctrl+P
Activate the BIOS Boot Menu.
Not applicable
F9
Ctrl+O
Launch Oracle System Assistant. BIOS
boots to Oracle System Assistant,
bypassing the current Boot Options
Priority list for this one-time boot
method.
Activate Load Optimal Values pop-up
menu. (Not applicable to UEFI Driver
Control menu)
F10
Ctrl+S
Not applicable
Activate Save and Exit pop-up menu.
(Not applicable to UEFI Driver Control
menu)
F12
Ctrl+N
Activate Network boot.
Not applicable
Related Information
■
■
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 245
Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus
You can access the BIOS Setup Utility screens from the following interfaces:
■
■
Use a USB keyboard and VGA monitor connected directly to the server. (A mouse is not
required to access the BIOS Setup Utility.)
Use a terminal (or terminal emulator connected to a computer) through the serial port on the
back panel of the server.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
243
Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus
■
1.
Connect to the server using the Oracle ILOM Remote System Console Plus application.
Reset or power on the server.
For example, to reset the server:
■
■
■
From the local server, press the Power button on the front panel of the server to power off
the server, and then press the Power button again to power on the server.
From the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Reset from the Select Action list.
From the Oracle ILOM CLI, type reset /System
The power-on self-test (POST) sequence begins.
2.
To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, press the F2 key (Ctrl+E from a serial connection)
when prompted and while the BIOS is running the power-on self-tests (POST).
The BIOS Setup Utility Main Menu screen appears.
Related Information
■
■
■
244
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
“BIOS Key Mappings” on page 243
“BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options”
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus
Navigate BIOS Setup Utility Menus
To navigate the menus or options listed on a menu, use the arrow keys. The currently selected
option or sub-menu is highlighted. For further instructions on how to navigate and change
settings in the BIOS Setup Utility, refer to the online information provided on the menu.
1.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
2.
Use the left and right arrow keys to select the different primary menu options.
As you select each menu option, the top-level screen for that menu option appears.
3.
To navigate options presented on a top-level screen, use the up and down arrow
keys.
Only options that can be modified are highlighted when you press the up and down arrow keys.
■
If an option can be modified, as you select the option, user instructions for
modifying the option appear in the right column of the screen.
■
If an option is a link to a sub-screen, a description of the sub-menu content
appears in the right column.
4.
Modify an option by pressing the + or - keys (plus or minus keys) or by pressing
Enter and selecting the desired option from the pop-up menus.
5.
Press the Esc key to return from a sub-menu screen to the previous menu
screen.
Pressing Esc from a top-level menu is equivalent to selecting the Discard Changes and Exit
option from the Save & Exit Menu.
6.
Modify parameters as needed.
7.
Press the F10 key to save your changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Alternatively, you can select the Save & Exit Menu, and then select the Save Changes and
Reset to save your changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Note - After modifying any BIOS settings and selecting Save Changes and Reset from the
Save & Exit Menu, the subsequent reboot might take longer than a typical reboot where no
settings were modified. The additional delay is required to ensure that changes to the BIOS
settings are synchronized with Oracle ILOM.
Related Information
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
245
Using UEFI
■
■
“BIOS Key Mappings” on page 243
“BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options”
Using UEFI
The BIOS firmware controls the system from power-on until an operating system is booted.
The Oracle Server X5-2L contains a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)-compatible
BIOS that can be configured to support either UEFI or Legacy BIOS modes. The BIOS can be
configured to support either UEFI or Legacy BIOS modes. Legacy BIOS is the default mode,
and should be used with software and adapters that do not have UEFI drivers
This section includes the following information:
■
■
■
■
“Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 246
“Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot Modes” on page 247
“UEFI Boot Mode Advantages” on page 247
“Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards” on page 248
Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode
You can select either Legacy BIOS Boot Mode or UEFI Boot Mode. Legacy BIOS Boot Mode
is the default.
If you change BIOS boot modes, the boot candidates from the previously selected mode are
no longer available from the Boot Options Priority List in the BIOS Setup Utility. The boot
candidates from the new mode appear in the Boot Options Priority List only after you select
Save Changes and Reset from the BIOS Setup Utility menu. Use the Oracle ILOM BIOS
Backup and Restore function to preserve the BIOS configuration in case you want to switch
back to the previously selected mode. For information, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
All supported operating systems can use either UEFI Boot Mode or Legacy BIOS Boot Mode.
However, once you choose a boot mode and install an operating system, if you reboot the server
and select a different boot mode, the installed image can only be used in the mode in which
it was installed. For instructions for selecting either UEFI Boot Mode or Legacy BIOS Boot
Mode, see “Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode” on page 251.
Choose Legacy BIOS Boot Mode to allow host bus adapters (HBAs) to use option ROMs, and
when software or adapters do not have UEFI drivers. In Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, only boot
candidates that support Legacy BIOS Boot Mode appear in the Boot Options Priority List in the
BIOS Setup Utility.
246
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Using UEFI
Choose UEFI Boot Mode when software and adapters use UEFI drivers. You can manually
select UEFI Boot Mode during system setup. In UEFI Boot Mode, only boot candidates that
support UEFI Boot Mode appear in the Boot Options Priority List in the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot Modes” on page 247
“UEFI Boot Mode Advantages” on page 247
“Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards” on page 248
Switching Between Legacy BIOS and UEFI Boot
Modes
When switching between Legacy BIOS Boot Mode and UEFI BIOS Boot Mode (either
direction), BIOS settings that affect the Boot Options Priority list settings will be changed. If
the boot mode is changed, the boot candidates from the previous boot mode disappear. The boot
candidates for the newly changed boot mode appear after you save your changes and reset the
host and in the next boot to the BIOS Setup Utility.
Because the settings for a given mode do not persist after a transition between modes,
you should use the BIOS Backup and Restore feature to capture and preserve the BIOS
configuration if you intend to switch back to the previous boot mode and want to retain your
previous BIOS settings. For information about the BIOS Backup and Restore feature, refer to
the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 246
“UEFI Boot Mode Advantages” on page 247
“Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards” on page 248
UEFI Boot Mode Advantages
When the option is available to choose between a Legacy BIOS Boot Mode or UEFI BIOS
Boot Mode operating system installation, the advantages to choosing a UEFI BIOS Boot Mode
installation include the following:
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
247
Using BIOS for Resource Allocation
■
■
■
■
Avoids Legacy Option ROM address constraints. For more information, see “Legacy Option
ROM Allocation” on page 249.
Supports operating system boot partitions greater than 2 terabytes (2 TB) in size. For more
information about limitations for supported operating systems, refer to the Oracle Server
X5-2L Product Notes at http://www.oracle.com/goto/X5-2L/docs.
Integrates PCIe device configuration utilities within the BIOS Setup Utility menus. For
more information, see “BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options”.
Displays bootable operating system images in the boot list as labeled entities, for example,
you will see a Windows boot manager label as opposed to raw device labels.
Related Information
■
■
“Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 246
“Select the Boot Device” on page 252
Configuration Utilities for Add-In Cards
The method for interacting with configuration utilities for add-in cards and (system resident) I/
O adapters differs depending on whether Legacy BIOS Boot Mode or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode
is used.
In Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, I/O adapter utilities are invoked during BIOS POST progression
using hot keys identified by the adapter Option ROM during POST. When the hot key is
pressed, the adapter specific configuration utility interface is presented. Often the interface will
have a vendor-specific design.
In UEFI BIOS Boot Mode, the configuration screens for the add-in cards will appear as menu
items in the BIOS Advanced Menu as part of the standard BIOS Setup Utility screens. For
example, if the Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID host bus adapter is installed in the
server, the configuration utility for the HBA appears as a menu selection under the iSCSI menu
option on the BIOS Advanced Menu.
Related Information
■
“Selecting Legacy BIOS or UEFI Boot Mode” on page 246
Using BIOS for Resource Allocation
This section explains how the BIOS allocates Option ROM and I/O resources.
248
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Using BIOS for Resource Allocation
■
“Legacy Option ROM Allocation” on page 249
Legacy Option ROM Allocation
In Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, there are PC architecture constraints on Legacy Option ROM
allocation. These constraints do not apply to UEFI Option ROMs, which are often referred to as
UEFI drivers.
Choose Legacy BIOS Boot Mode to allow host bus adapters (HBAs) to use Option ROMs.
Choose UEFI BIOS Boot Mode to use UEFI drivers.
The system BIOS allocates 128 KB of address space for Legacy Option ROMs. This address
space is shared between on-board devices and PCIe add-in cards. This fixed address space
limitation is imposed by the PC architecture and not by the BIOS itself. It is possible to exhaust
the available address space when installing PCIe add-in cards. When the address space is
exhausted, Oracle ILOM displays an Option ROM Space Exhausted message, which means
that one or more devices cannot load Option ROMs.
For example, if you install a SAS PCIe card, you might encounter a message similar to the
following message in the Oracle ILOM event log:
Option ROM Space Exhausted - Device XXX Disabled
By default, all on-board Legacy Options ROMs are enabled in the BIOS. However, you can
disable most of these Option ROMs, unless they are required to support booting from the
associated device or to provide some other boot-time function. For example, it is not necessary
to load the Option ROM for the on-board network ports unless you want to boot from one or
more network ports (even then, you can disable the Options ROMs for the remaining ports).
To minimize server boot time and reduce the likelihood of exhausting the available Option
ROM address space, disable the Option ROMs for all devices that you do not intend to boot
from. Enable Option ROMs only for those devices from which you intend to boot. If Option
ROMs are enabled for more than one boot device, you might encounter an Option ROM space
exhausted condition. If you encounter the Option ROM space exhausted condition even after
disabling all devices from which you do not intend to boot, then disable additional Option
ROMs. Under some circumstances it might be necessary to disable Option ROMs for all
devices except for the primary boot device.
Related Information
■
■
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“Configure Option ROM Settings” on page 262
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
249
Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks
Common BIOS Setup Utility Tasks
This section presents the procedures for some of the BIOS setup tasks that you will typically
perform when setting up and managing the server.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings” on page 250
“Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode” on page 251
“Select the Boot Device” on page 252
“Enable or Disable Oracle System Assistant” on page 254
“Configure TPM Support” on page 256
“Configure SP Network Settings” on page 259
“Configure Option ROM Settings” on page 262
“Configure I/O Resource Allocation” on page 265
“Exit BIOS Setup Utility” on page 266
Verify BIOS Factory Default Settings
In the BIOS Setup Utility, you return the BIOS settings to the optimal factory default values, as
well as view and edit settings as needed. Any changes that you make in the BIOS Setup Utility
(using the F2 key) persist until the next time you change the settings.
Before you begin, ensure that the following requirements are met:
■
■
1.
A hard disk drive or solid state drive is properly installed in the server.
A console connection is established to the server.
Reset or power on the server.
■
■
■
From the local server, press the Power button on the front panel of the server to power off
the server, and then press the Power button again to power on the server.
From the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Reset from the Select Action list.
From the Oracle ILOM CLI, type reset /System
The server resets.
2.
When prompted, press the F2 key to access the BIOS Setup Utility.
3.
To ensure that the factory defaults are set, do the following:
a.
250
Press the F9 key to automatically load the optimal factory default settings.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode
A message appears prompting you to continue this operation by selecting OK or to cancel
the operation by selecting Cancel.
b.
In the message, highlight OK, and then press Enter.
The BIOS Setup Utility screen appears with the cursor highlighting the first value on the
screen.
4.
Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Alternatively, you can save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility by navigating to the
Save & Exit Menu and selecting Save Changes and Reset.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
“BIOS Key Mappings” on page 243
Select Legacy BIOS or UEFI BIOS Boot Mode
The BIOS firmware supports both Legacy BIOS BOOT Mode and UEFI BIOS Boot Mode.
The default setting is Legacy BIOS Boot Mode. For more information about selecting the BIOS
boot mode, refer to “Using UEFI” on page 246.
1.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
2.
From the BIOS Main Menu screen, select Boot.
The Boot Menu screen appears.
3.
From the Boot Menu screen, use the up and down arrow keys to select UEFI/
Legacy BIOS Boot Mode, and then press Enter.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
251
Select the Boot Device
The UEFI/BIOS dialog box appears.
Note - You cannot configure the boot device priority after switching the boot mode. A system
reboot is required to properly populate the Boot Options Priority list with devices that support
the chosen boot mode.
4.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the appropriate Legacy or UEFI mode,
and then press Enter.
5.
Press F10 to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
“BIOS Key Mappings” on page 243
Select the Boot Device
The Boot Options Priority list contents depend on which BIOS mode is selected. When UEFI
Boot Mode is selected, only UEFI boot candidates will be initialized and displayed in the Boot
252
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Select the Boot Device
Options Priority list. When Legacy BIOS is selected, only Legacy BIOS boot candidates are
initialized and displayed.
In addition to using the F2 key to view or edit the system BIOS settings, you can use the F8
key during the BIOS startup to specify a temporary boot device. This selected boot device is in
effect only for the current system boot. The permanent boot device specified using the F2 key
will be in effect after booting from the temporary boot device.
1.
Reset or power on the server.
■
■
■
2.
From the local server, press the Power button on the front panel of the server to power off
the server, and then press the Power button again to power on the server.
From the Oracle ILOM web interface, click Host Management → Power Control and
select Reset from the Select Action list.
From the Oracle ILOM CLI, type reset /System
Press the F8 key (or Ctrl+P from a serial connection) when prompted while the
UEFI is running the power-on self-test (POST).
The Please Select Boot Device dialog box appears.
3.
In the Please Select Boot Device dialog box, select the boot device according to
the operating system and UEFI Boot Mode you elected to use, and then press
Enter.
Note - Based on the boot mode you selected (UEFI BIOS Boot Mode or Legacy BIOS Boot
Mode), the Please Select Boot Device dialog box displays only the applicable devices. For
example, when the UEFI BIOS Boot Mode is elected, only UEFI BIOS boot devices are
displayed in the dialog box.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
253
Enable or Disable Oracle System Assistant
A dialog box similar to the following appears.
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the operating system from the
selected boot device.
Related Information
■
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
“BIOS Key Mappings” on page 243
Enable or Disable Oracle System Assistant
If you have disabled Oracle System Assistant, you can use the BIOS Setup Utility Boot Menu
to put the USB device in an online state, so that Oracle System Assistant becomes available to
the operating system.
1.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
2.
254
In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the Boot Menu.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Enable or Disable Oracle System Assistant
The Boot Menu screen appears.
3.
Select OSA Configuration.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
255
Configure TPM Support
The OSA Configuration screen appears. The setting for OSA Internal Support is either Enabled
or Disabled.
4.
To change the setting, use the + or - key (plus or minus key), and then press
Enter to select either Enabled or Disabled.
5.
Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
“BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 289
Configure TPM Support
If you intend to use the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) feature set, you must configure the
server to support this feature.
Note - TPM enables you to administer the TPM security hardware in your server. For additional
information about implementing this feature, refer to the Windows Trusted Platform Module
Management documentation provided by your operating system or third-party software vendor.
256
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Configure TPM Support
1.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
2.
In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the Advanced Menu.
The Advanced Menu screen appears.
3.
In the Advanced Menu screen, select Trusted Computing.
The TPM Configuration screen appears.
4.
TPM Support is listed as Disabled (it is disabled by default). Select TPM Support
and press Enter.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
257
Configure TPM Support
A TPM Support dialog box appears.
5.
258
In the dialog box, set TPM Support to Enable, and then press Enter.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Configure SP Network Settings
The updated TPM Configuration screen appears.
6.
Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
Microsoft's Windows Trusted Platform Module Management documentation
Configure SP Network Settings
Choose one of the following methods to specify service processor (SP) network settings:
■
■
BIOS – Assign the IP address for the server SP from the BIOS Setup Utility on the
Advanced Menu.
Oracle ILOM – For instructions on setting the IP address for the server SP using Oracle
ILOM, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation
Library at http://www.oracle.com./goto/ILOM/docs.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
259
Configure SP Network Settings
■
1.
Oracle System Assistant – For instructions on using Oracle System Assistant to configure
SP network settings, refer to Oracle X5 Series Servers Administration Guide at http://
www.oracle.com/goto/x86AdminDiag/docs.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
2.
In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the Advanced Menu.
The Advanced Menu screen appears.
3.
In the Advanced Menu, select BMC Network Configuration, and then press Enter.
The BMC Network Configuration screen appears.
260
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Configure SP Network Settings
The BMC is the Baseboard Management Controller.
4.
Select Refresh, and then press Enter to display the current BMC network
settings.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
261
Configure Option ROM Settings
The BMC Network Configuration screen refreshes. Scroll down to review BMC network
settings.
5.
Select Commit to update the BMC network settings with the latest values.
6.
Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
Configure Option ROM Settings
1.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
2.
262
In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the IO Menu.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Configure Option ROM Settings
The IO Menu screen appears.
3.
In the IO Menu, select either Internal Devices or Add In Cards and press Enter
to display the internal device or add-in card slot for which you want to enable or
disable Option ROM.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
263
Configure Option ROM Settings
The Internal Devices or Add In Cards screen appears.
4.
264
Select the internal device or add In card slot that you want to configure.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Configure I/O Resource Allocation
The Option ROM screen for that internal device or add-in card slot appears.
5.
6.
Select OpROM Enable and press Enter. Do one of the following:
■
Select Enabled to enable the Option ROM setting.
■
Select Disabled to disable the Option ROM setting.
Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
■
■
“Legacy Option ROM Allocation” on page 249
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
Configure I/O Resource Allocation
1.
Access the BIOS Setup Utility menus.
See “Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243.
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
265
Exit BIOS Setup Utility
2.
In the BIOS Setup Utility menus, navigate to the IO Menu.
The IO Menu screen appears.
3.
Select Add In Cards and press Enter to display the add-in card slots.
4.
Select the slot for which you want to configure the card, and press Enter.
5.
Do one of the following:
6.
■
Select Enabled to enable I/O resource allocation for the I/O card.
■
Select Disabled to disable I/O resource allocation for the I/O card.
Press the F10 key to save the changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Related Information
■
■
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
Exit BIOS Setup Utility
266
1.
Use the left and right arrow keys to navigate to the top-level Save & Exit Menu.
2.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the desired action.
3.
Press Enter to select the option.
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Exit BIOS Setup Utility
A confirmation dialog box appears.
4.
In the confirmation dialog box, select Yes to proceed and exit the BIOS Setup
Utility, or select No to stop the exit process.
Note - After modifying any BIOS settings and selecting Save Changes and Exit from the
Save & Exit Menu, the subsequent reboot might take longer than a typical reboot where no
settings were modified. The additional delay is required to ensure that changes to the BIOS
settings are synchronized with Oracle ILOM.
Related Information
■
■
“Access BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 243
“BIOS Setup Utility Menus” on page 242
Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters
267
268
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
This section includes screenshots of the main menus in the BIOS Setup Utility for the Oracle
Server X5-2L. Following the screenshot for each menu is a table of the options available from
that menu.
Description
Links
Review the BIOS Main Menu selections.
“BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 269
Review the BIOS Advanced Menu selections.
“BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 273
Review the BIOS IO Menu selections.
“BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 285
Review the Boot Menu selections.
“BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 289
Review the BIOS Exit Menu selections.
“BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 290
Related Information
■
■
Oracle X5 Series Servers Administration Guide at: http://www.oracle.com/goto/
x86AdminDiag/docs
“Setting Up BIOS Configuration Parameters”
BIOS Main Menu Selections
This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Main Menu. The options that are available from
the Main Menu are described in the table that follows. Options in the table that are marked as
“(R/O)” are read-only information and cannot be changed.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
269
BIOS Main Menu Selections
The following table describes the options provided by the BIOS Main menu and sub-menus.
TABLE 23
BIOS Main Menu Options
Setup Options
Options
Project Version (R/O)
Defaults
Description
BIOS version is displayed. This string
is a unique identifier used to reference
a specific BIOS release. Format is
XXYYZZPP, which indicates:
■
■
■
■
XX - Unique project/platform code.
YY - BIOS major release.
ZZ - BIOS minor release.
PP - Build number.
Example: 18.01.04.01
System Date
Current date is displayed. You can
change the date setting.
Example: [Thu 06/20/2014]
System Time
Current time is displayed. You can
change the time setting.
Example: [13:38:27]
QPI Link Speed (R/O)
SLOW/
6.4 GT/s
7.2 GT/s
270
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Intel Quick Path Interconnect (QPI)
operational speed is displayed.
BIOS Main Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
8.0 GT/s
9.6 GT/s
Total Memory (R/O)
Memory in gigabytes is displayed.
Example: 224 GB
Current Memory Speed (R/O)
Memory speed is displayed.
Example: 1333 MHz
USB Devices (R/O)
Detected USB devices are displayed.
Example: 1 Drive, 2 keyboards, 1 mouse,
3 hubs
BMC Status (R/O)
Detected condition of the service
processor.
Example: BMC is working
BMC Firmware Revision (R/O)
The service processor firmware version
is displayed.
Example: 3.2.0.0 r84011
PRODUCT INFORMATION
(R/O)
Product information is displayed.
Product Name
Product name is displayed.
Example: Oracle Server X5-2L
Product Serial Number
Product serial number is displayed.
Example: 1134FML00V
Board Serial Number
Board serial number is displayed.
Example: 0328MSL-1132U900
CPU INFORMATION (R/O)
Attributes of a single processor (CPU)
are defined. A separate information
structure is provided for each processor
supported in the system. Most of the
values are dependent on the processor.
Socket 0 CPU Information (R/O)
If CPU socket 0 is populated, the
following options are listed. Otherwise,
displays “Not Present.”
Genuine Intel CPU @ 2.6 GHz
Processor ID brand is displayed.
CPU Signature
Processor information is displayed.
Example: 306F1
Microcode Patch
Software update (microcode patch)
information is displayed.
Example: 80000011
Max CPU Speed
Maximum non-turbo speed of the
processor is displayed.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
271
BIOS Main Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Example: 2100 MHz
Min CPU Speed
Minimum speed of the processor is
displayed.
Example: 1200 MHz
Processor Cores
Number of available processor cores is
displayed.
Example: 18
Active processor cores
Number of active processor cores is
displayed.
Intel HT Technology
Indicates whether Intel Hyper Threading
is supported.
Intel VT-x Technology
Indicates whether Intel Virtualization
Technology is supported.
L1 Data Cache
Example: 448
L1 Code Cache
Example: 448
L2 Cache
Example: 3584 KB
L3 Cache
Example: 35840 KB
Socket 1 CPU Information (R/O)
If CPU socket 1 is populated, the same
options as Socket 0 CPU Information
are displayed. Otherwise, displays “Not
Present.”
DIMM INFORMATION (R/O)
Memory module (DIMM) presence and
size information are displayed.
Socket 0 DIMMs (R/O)
For D0...D11, if a DIMM is present,
memory size (in gigabytes) is displayed.
Otherwise, displays “Not Present.”
Socket 1 DIMMs (R/O)
Same as CPU socket 0.
SECURITY SETTING
Configure the security setting.
Administrator Password
Set the Administrator password.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
272
“BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 273
“BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 285
“BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 289
“BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 290
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Advanced Menu. The options that are available
from the Advanced Menu are described in the sections that follow. Options in the tables that are
marked as “(R/O)” are read-only information and cannot be changed.
The following sections describe the BIOS Advanced Menu options:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration Options” on page 274
“BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management Configuration Options” on page 274
“BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration Option” on page 275
“BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports Options” on page 276
“BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console Redirection Options” on page 276
“BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options” on page 278
“BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options” on page 279
“BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration Options” on page 279
“BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration Options” on page 282
“BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options” on page 284
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
273
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration
Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu processor configuration options.
TABLE 24
BIOS Advanced Menu Processor Configuration
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Hyper-threading
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Use to enable Hyper Threading.
When enabled, two threads
are available per enabled core.
When disabled, only one thread
per enabled core is available.
Active Processor Cores
A minimum of one up to the
maximum number of cores
available in the processor
package.
All
The number of cores to enable in
each processor package.
Execute Disable Bit
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
When disabled, forces XD
features flag to always return 0.
Hardware Prefetcher
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable the mid-level cache
(MLC) streamer prefetcher
(MSR 1A4h bit [0]).
Adjacent Cache Prefetch
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable the mid-level cache
(MLC) streamer prefetcher
(MSR 1A4h bit [1]).
DCU Streamer Prefetcher
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable DCU streamer
prefetcher, which is a L1 data
cache prefetcher (MSR 1A4h
[2]).
DCP IP Prefetcher
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable DCU IP prefetcher,
which is a L1 data cache
prefetcher (MSR 1A4h [3]).
Intel Virtualization Technology
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
When enabled, a Virtual
Machine Manager (VMM) can
utilize the additional hardware
capabilities provided by Intel
Virtualization Technology.
BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management
Configuration Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu CPU power management
configuration options.
274
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
TABLE 25
BIOS Advanced Menu CPU Power Management Configuration
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Power Technology
Disabled/Energy Efficient/
Custom
Custom
Enables the power management
features.
EIST (GV3)
Endabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enable or disable Enhanced Intel
SpeedStep Technology (EIST).
Turbo Mode
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled mode is supported only
if Turbo Mode is supported in
the CPU. Enabled mode also
requires that Enhanced Multi
Threaded Thermal Monitoring
(EMTTM) be enabled on the
CPU.
CPU C3 report
Enabled/Disabled
Disabled
Enable/disable the CPU
C3 (ACPI C3) report to the
operating system.
CPU C6 report
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enable/disable the CPU
C6 (ACPI C3) report to the
operating system.
CPU C7 report
Enabled/Disabled
Disabled
Enable/disable the CPU
C7 (ACPI C3) report to the
operating system.
Package C State limit
Endabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enable/disable Package C State
limit.
Energy_PERF_BIAS_CFG
mode
PERF/Balanced Perf/Balanced
Power/Power
Balanced Perf
Use this option to select the
Energy_PERF_BIAS_CFG
mode.
Uncore Frequency Scaling
Endabled/Disabled
Disabled
Enable/disable Uncore
Frequency Scaling (USF).
BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration
Option
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu memory configuration option.
TABLE 26
BIOS Advanced Menu Memory Configuration Option
Setup Option
Options
Defaults
Description
Numa
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enable or disable Non Uniform
Memory Access (NUMA).
COD Enable
Enabled/Disabled
Disabled
Enable or disable Cluster on
Die.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
275
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu USB ports options.
TABLE 27
BIOS Advanced Menu USB Ports
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
EHCI Hand-off
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Enable or disable Enhanced
Host Controller Interface
(EHCI) hand-off support. This
is a workaround for operating
systems without EHCI hand-off
support. The EHCI change of
ownership should be claimed by
the EHCI driver.
Port 60/64 Emulation
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable I/O port 60h/64h
emulation support. Enable
this setting for the complete
USB keyboard legacy support
for non-USB aware operating
systems.
EHCI Controller 1
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable EHCI
Controller 1.
EHCI Controller 2
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable EHCI
Controller 2.
Rear Port #0
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable USB Rear Port
0.
Rear Port #1
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable USB Rear Port
1.
Front Port #0
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable USB Front
Port 0.
Front Port #1
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable USB Front
Port 1.
Internal Port #0
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable USB Internal
Port 0.
Internal Port #1
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable USB Internal
Port 1.
BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console
Redirection Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu serial port console redirection options.
276
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
TABLE 28
BIOS Advanced Menu Serial Port Console Redirection Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
EMS Console Redirection
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Enable or disable console
redirection for Windows
Emergency Management
Service (EMS) administration.
Console Redirection
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable console
redirection.
Terminal Type
VT100/VT100+/VT-UTF8/
ANSI
VT100+
Select the emulation for the
terminal:
■ VT100: ASCII character set.
■ VT100+: Extends VT100 to
support color, function keys,
etc.
■ VT-UTF8: Uses UTF8
encoding to map Unicode
characters onto one or more
bytes.
■ ANSI: Extended ASCII
character set.
Bits per Second
9600
9600
Select the serial port
transmission speed. The
speed must be matched on the
connecting serial device. Long
or noisy lines require lower
speeds.
19200
38400
57600
115200
Data Bits
7/8
8
Select the data bits.
Parity
None/Even/Odd/Mark/Space
None
A parity bit can be sent with
the data bits to detect some
transmission errors.
■ None: No parity bits are
sent.
■ Even: Parity bit is 0 if the
number of 1s in the data bits
is even.
■ Odd: Parity bit is 0 if the
number of 1s in the data bits
is odd.
■ Mark: Parity bit is always 1.
■ Space: Parity bit is always 0.
Mark and Space parity do not
allow for error detection. They
can be used as an additional data
bit.
Stop Bits
1/2
1
Stop bits indicate the end of
a serial data packet. (A start
bit indicates the beginning
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
277
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
of a serial data packet.) The
standard setting is 1 stop bit.
Communication with slow
devices may require more than 1
stop bit.
Flow Control
None, Hardware RTS/CTS,
Software Xon/Xoff
None
Flow control can prevent data
loss from buffer overflow. When
sending data, if the receiving
buffers are full, a 'stop' signal
can be sent to stop the data flow.
Once the buffers are empty, a
'start' signal can be sent to restart
the flow. Hardware flow control
uses two wires to send start/stop
signals.
BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu trusted computing options.
TABLE 29
BIOS Advanced Menu Trusted Computing Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
TPM Support
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Enable or disable Trusted
Platform Module (TPM)
support. Only UEFI BIOS
implements this setup option. If
disabled, the OS will not show
TPM. Reset of the platform is
required.
TPM State
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Displays whether TPM Support
is enabled.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
Pending Operation
None/Enable Take Ownership/
Disable Take Ownership/TPM
Clear
None
Used to schedule an operation
for the security device.
Note - Your computer will
reboot during restart in order to
change the state of a security
device.
Current Status Information
TPM Enabled Status
278
If TPM Support is disabled,
Current Status Information
displays SUPPORT Turned
OFF.”
Disabled/Enabled
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Disabled
Use this option to provide the
current capability state of the
security device.
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
TPM Active Status
Deactivated/Activated
Deactivated
Use this option to provide the
current capability state of the
security device.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
TPM Owner Status
Owned/Unowned
Unowned
Use this option to provide the
current ownership state.
Note - This option is available
only if TPM Support is set to
enabled.
BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu network stack options.
TABLE 30
BIOS Advanced Menu Network Stack Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Network Stack
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable the UEFI
network stack.
Ipv4 PXE Support
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable IPv4 PXE
Boot support. If disable, the
IPv4 Boot Option will not be
created.
Ipv6 PXE Support
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Enable or disable IPv6 PXE
Boot support. If disable, the
IPv6 Boot Option will not be
created.
BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration
Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu BMC network configuration options.
TABLE 31
BIOS Advanced Menu BMC Network Configuration Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Current Active Management
Port (R/O)
NA
NETMGT
The currently active
management port.
Refresh
NA
NA
Refresh current BMC LAN
information with the latest
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
279
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
information from the service
processor.
Active Mgmt Port
NET MGT/NET0/NET1/NET2/
NET3
NET MGT
Use to change the currently
active network management
port.
Commit
NA
NA
Commit the current BMC
network LAN information.
IPv4 Configuration
NA
NA
Current configuration of the
IPv4 settings is displayed.
1
Current channel number is
displayed.
Channel Number (R/O)
Current IPv4 IP Assignment in
BMC (R/O)
Static/Dynamic
Static
Set the IPV4 IP assignment to
Static or Dynamic. This setting
determines whether the service
processor is assigned a static
IPv4 address or assigned a
dynamic IPv4 address using
Dynamic Host Control Protocol
(DHCP).
Current IPv4 address in BMC
(R/O)
NA
NA
Displays the current IPv4
address in the BMC.
Current IPv4 MAC Address in
BMC (R/O)
NA
NA
If IPv4 Assignment is set to
Static, set the IPv4 address for
the service processor.
Example: 172.31.255.255
Current IPv4 Subnet Mask in
BMC (R/O)
NA
NA
Current IPv4 Default Gateway
in BMC
NA
NA
If the IPv4 Assignment is set to
Static, set the IPv4 subnet mask.
Example: 255.255.255.0
If the IPv4 Assignment is set
to Static, set the IPv4 default
gateway
Example: 172.31.255.255
Refresh
Refresh the current BMC LAN
information.
IPv4 IP Assignment
Static/Dynamic
Static
Current IPv4 assignment.
IPv4 Address
NA
NA
If set, current IPv4 address is
displayed.
IPv4 Subnet Mask
NA
NA
If set, current IPv4 Subnet Mask
is displayed.
IPv4 Default Gateway
NA
NA
If set, current IPv4 Default
Gateway is displayed.
Commit
Commit the current BMC LAN
information.
IPv6 Configuration
Current configuration of the
IPv6 settings is displayed.
280
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
IPv6 addresses are written with
hexadecimal digits and colon
separators. For example: 2001:
0db0:000:82a1:0000:0000:1234:
abcd.
IPv6 addresses are composed of
two parts: a 64-bit subnet prefix
and a 64-bit host interface ID.
To shorten the IPv6 address, you
can (1) omit all leading zeros,
and (2) replace one consecutive
group of zeros with a double
colon (::). For example: 2001:
db0:0:82a1::1234:abcd.
Channel Number (R/O)
1
Current channel number is
displayed.
Current IPv6 State (R/O)
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Current IPv6 state is displayed.
Current IPv6 Auto
Configuration (R/O)
Stateful/Stateless
Stateless
Current IPv6 autoconfiguration
parameters are displayed.
Link Local IPv6 Address (R/O)
Current link local IPv6 address
is displayed.
Example: fe80::214:4fff:feca:
5f7e/64
Static IPv6 Address (R/O)
Current static IPv6 address is
displayed.
Example: 2001:0db0:000:82a1:
0000:0000:1234:abcd
IPv6 Gateway (R/O)
Current IPv6 gateway address is
displayed.
Example: fe80::211:5dff:febe:
5000/128
Current dynamic IPv6 addresses
are displayed.
Dynamic IPv6 Address 1-n (R/
O)
Example: fec0:a:8:b7:214:4fff:
feca:5f7e/64
Refresh
Select Refresh to update to the
current settings.
IPv6 State
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Set the IPv6 state to enabled or
disabled.
Auto IPv6 Configuration
Disabled/
Disabled
Autoconfiguration options are:
Stateless/
Dhcpv6_stateless/
Dhcpv6_stateful
■ Disabled: When
autoconfiguration is
disabled, only the Link
Local address is set. None
of the autoconfiguration
options to configure an IPv6
address are run.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
281
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
■ Stateless: When enabled,
the IPv6 Stateless
autoconfiguration is run to
learn the IPv6 addresses for
the device.
■ Dhcpv6_stateless:
When enabled, the
Dhcpv6_stateless
autoconfiguration is run to
learn the DNS and domain
information for the device.
■ Dhcpv6_stateful: When
enabled, the Dhcpv6_stateful
autoconfiguration is run to
learn the IP addresses and
DNS information for the
device.
Static IPv6 Address (R/O)
Set the static IPv6 address.
Example: 2001:0db0:000.82a1:
0000:0000:1234:abcd
Commit
Commit the current BMC LAN
information.
BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration
Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI configuration options.
TABLE 32
BIOS Advanced Menu iSCSI Configuration Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
iSCSI Initiator Name
NA (must be specified)
None
The worldwide unique name of
the iSCSI Initiator. Only IQN
format is accepted.
iSCSI Attempt Name
NA (must be specified)
None
The readable name that you
assigned to this attempt.
iSCSI Mode
Disabled/Enabled/Enabled for
MPIO
Disabled
Set to Enabled for multipath I/
O (MPIO). MPIO can boost the
performance of an application
by load balancing traffic across
multiple ports.
Internet Protocol
IP4/IP6/Autoconfigure
IP4
Can be set to IP4, IP6, or
Autoconfigure. The initiator
IP address is assigned by the
system to IP6. In Autoconfigure
mode, the iSCSI driver attempts
Add an Attempt
282
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
to connect to the iSCSI target
using the IPv4 stack. If this fails,
then the iSCSI driver attempt to
connect using the IPv6 stack.
Connection Retry Count
0 to 16
0
The count range is 0 to 16. If set
to 0, there are no retries.
Connection Establishing
Timeout
NA
1,000
The timeout value in
milliseconds. The minimum
value is 100 milliseconds and
the maximum is 20 seconds.
Configure ISID
Derived from the MAC address
The default value is derived
from the Mac Address
The OUI-format ISID is 6 bytes.
The default value is derived
from the MAC address. Only the
last 3 bytes are configurable.
Example: Update
0ABBCCDDEEFF to
0ABBCCF07901 by inputting
F07901
Enable DHCP
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
Enable or disable DHCP
Initiator IP Address
NA
0.0.0.0
Use to set initiator IP address in
dotted-decimal notation.
Initiator Subnet Mask
NA
0.0.0.0
Use to set initiator subnet mask
IP address in dotted-decimal
notation.
Gateway
NA
0.0.0.0
Use to set initiator gateway
IP address in dotted-decimal
notation.
Target Name
NA
NA
The worldwide unique name of
the target. Only IQN format is
accepted.
Target IP address
0.0.0.0
None
Use to set target IP address in
dotted-decimal notation.
Target Port
3260
Use to change target port
number.
Boot LUN
0
Use to set the hexadecimal
representation of the boot logical
unit number (LUN).
Example: 4752-3A4F-6b7e2F99
Authentication Type
CHAP/None
CHAP
Define the ChallengeHandshake Authentication
Protocol (CHAP). Available
settings are CHAP, Kerberos,
and None.
CHAP Type
One Way/Mutual
One Way
Use to set CHAP type to either
One Way or Mutual.
CHAP Name
NA
None
Use to set CHAP name.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
283
BIOS Advanced Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
CHAP Secret
NA
None
Use to set the CHAP secret
password. The secret length
range is 12 to 16 bytes.
Delete Attempts
NA
NA
Use to delete one or more
attempts.
Change Attempt Order
NA
NA
Use to change the order of
attempts. Use arrow keys to
select the attempt, then press +/keys to move the attempt up/
down in the attempt order list.
BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options
The following table describes the BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet controller options.
TABLE 33
BIOS Advanced Menu Ethernet Controller Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Port Configuration Menu
NIC configuration
Use to configure the network
device port.
Link Speed (R/O)
Supported port speeds/Auto
Negotiate
NA
Specifies the port speed used for
the selected boot protocol.
Note - This option is not
supported
Wake on LAN
Disable/Enabled
NA
Enable or disable wake on LAN.
Note - This option is not
supported
Blink LEDs
0/1/2/3
0
Use to identify the physical
network port by blinking the
associated LED.
Port Configuration
Information
Displays and specifies the port
settings for the network device.
UEFI Driver (R/O)
NA
NA
Identifies the UEFI driver.
Adapter PBA (R/O)
NA
NA
Product board adapter (PBA)
number. You can use the Intel
Network Adapter PBA number
to search for the adapter's model
number. The PBA number is
a nine digit number that is the
last part of the adapter board
serial number. The PBA number
is presented in this format:
xxxxxxx-xxx, for example,
C80222-001.
Chip Type (R/O)
NA
NA
Manufacturer and model number
1528
Device identifier
PCI Device ID (R/O)
284
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS IO Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
PCI Address (R/O)
NA
NA
Bus device function identifier
Example format: Bus:Device:
Function
Link Status
Connected/Disconnected
Disconnected
Specifies the link status of the
network port.
MAC Address (R/O)
NA
None
Lists the MAC address of the
network interface card (NIC).
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 269
“BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 285
“BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 289
“BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 290
BIOS IO Menu Selections
This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS IO Menu. The options that are available from
the IO Menu are described in the sections that follow.
Note - PCIe slots 1, 2, 3, and Ethernet ports NET2 and NET3 are nonfunctional in single-
processor systems.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
285
BIOS IO Menu Selections
The following sections describe the BIOS IO Menu options.
■
■
■
■
■
“BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options” on page 286
“BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options” on page 287
“BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options” on page 287
“BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options” on page 288
“BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options” on page 288
BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options
The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu PCI subsystem settings options.
TABLE 34
BIOS IO Menu PCI Subsystem Settings Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
PCI 64 Bit Resources Allocation
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable 64-bit capable
devices to be decoded in above
4G address space. This setting
is available only if the system
supports 64-bit decoding.
286
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS IO Menu Selections
BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options
The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu IO virtualization options.
TABLE 35
BIOS IO Menu IO Virtualization Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
VT-d
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable Intel
Virtualization Technology for
directed I/O (VT-d) by reporting
the I/O device assignment to
VMM through DMA remapping
reporting (DMAR) Advance
Configuration Power Interface
(ACPI) tables.
SR-IOV
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Single Root I/O Virtualization
(SR-IOV) is used to configure
devices into multiple virtual
devices that can be used on
virtual OS installations. If
supported by the hardware
and set to enabled, all devices
within the system that are SRIOV capable are configured
to support SR-IOV and I/O
resources are allocated to the
device as normal. If set to
disabled, I/O resources are not
allocated to the device.
ARI
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
If Alternate Routing ID (ARI)
is supported by the hardware
and set to enabled, devices
are permitted to locate virtual
functions (VFs) in function
numbers 8 to 255 of the captured
bus number, instead of normal
function numbers 0 to 7.
BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options
The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu I/OAT configuration options.
TABLE 36
BIOS IO Menu I/OAT Configuration Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
Intel I/OAT
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable Intel I/OAT.
DCA Support
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable direct cache
access (DCA) support.
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
287
BIOS IO Menu Selections
BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options
The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu internal devices options.
TABLE 37
BIOS IO Menu Internal Devices Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
NET0
Description
Displays and provides options
to change the internal device
settings.
OpROM Enable
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
NET1, NET2, and NET3
Note - Ethernet ports NET2
and NET3 are nonfunctional in
single-processor systems.
Enable or disable Option ROM.
If set to enabled, Option ROM
for the card executes as normal.
If set to disabled, Option ROM
for the card is not copied into
memory and the execution of the
Option ROM is inhibited.
See NET0 description.
BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options
The following table describes the BIOS IO Menu add in cards options.
TABLE 38
BIOS IO Menu Add In Cards Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Slot 1
Displays and provides options
to change the settings of the
devices in PCIe slots.
Note - PCIe slot 1, slot 2, and
slot 3 are nonfunctional in
single-processor systems.
OpROM Enable
Disable/Enabled
Enabled
Slot 2, Slot 3, Slot 4, Slot 5,
and Slot 6
Related Information
■
■
■
■
288
Description
“BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 269
“BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 273
“BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 289
“BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 290
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Enable or disable Option ROM
for add-in card.
See Slot 1 description
BIOS Boot Menu Selections
BIOS Boot Menu Selections
This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Boot Menu. The options that are available from
the Boot Menu are described in the table that follows.
TABLE 39
BIOS Boot Menu Options
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
UEFI/BIOS Boot Mode
Legacy/UEFI
Legacy
Select either Legacy BIOS or UEFI as
the boot mode.
■ Enable UEFI: Only UEFI BIOS boot
options are initialized and presented
to the user.
■ Enable Legacy BIOS: Only Legacy
BIOS boot options are initialized and
presented to the user.
Retry Boot List
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
If enabled, BIOS automatically retries
to boot from the top of the Boot Options
Priority list when all devices have been
attempted and failed.
Network Boot Retry
Disabled/Enabled/Boot
List
Enabled
If enabled, BIOS automatically retries
the PXE list present in the system when
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
289
BIOS Exit Menu Selections
Setup Options
Options
Defaults
Description
all PXE attempts have failed. If set to
disabled, the system halts and displays
the error message “Network Boot Failed”
when all PXE boots failed. If set to Boot
List, fail over to the main Boot Options
Priority list.
Persistent Boot Support
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled
OSA Configuration
If enabled, the Persistent Boot feature is
enabled. If disabled, system reverts back
to the default boot handling from the next
boot.
Configure whether the operating system
recognizes Oracle System Assistant at
boot.
OSA Internal Support
Note - This option is
nonfunctional if the server does
not have an OSA USB flash drive
installed.
Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Enable or disable the OSA flash drive's
USB port.
Legacy Boot Option Priority
UEFI/Legacy
Legacy
Displays the system boot order.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 269
“BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 273
“BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 285
“BIOS Exit Menu Selections” on page 290
BIOS Exit Menu Selections
This section includes a screenshot of the BIOS Exit Menu. The options that are available from
the Exit Menu are described in the table that follows.
290
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
BIOS Exit Menu Selections
TABLE 40
BIOS Exit Menu Options
Setup Options
Description
Save Changes and Exit
Save changes and exit the BIOS Setup Utility.
Discard Changes and Exit
Exit the BIOS Setup Utility without saving changes.
Discard Changes
Discard any changes made to the setup options.
Restore Defaults
Restore/load the optimal default values for all of the setup options.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
“BIOS Main Menu Selections” on page 269
“BIOS Advanced Menu Selections” on page 273
“BIOS IO Menu Selections” on page 285
“BIOS Boot Menu Selections” on page 289
BIOS Setup Utility Menu Options
291
292
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP
Messages
This section includes information about monitoring components and identifying SNMP
messages for the Oracle Server X5-2L.
Description
Links
Review how Oracle ILOM monitors component health
and faults.
“Monitoring Component Health and Faults Using Oracle
ILOM” on page 293
Review information about system components and
nomenclature.
“Monitoring System Components” on page 294
Review SNMP traps generated by the server.
“Identifying SNMP Trap Messages” on page 304
Related Information
■
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at: http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs
Monitoring Component Health and Faults Using Oracle
ILOM
The Oracle ILOM 3.2 interfaces provide easy-to-view information about the health status of
system components. From the Oracle ILOM web interface or in the Oracle ILOM commandline interface (CLI), you can collect system-specific information about the server, determine the
health state of discrete components, and view any open problems on the server. Oracle ILOM
automatically detects system hardware faults and environmental conditions on the server. If a
problem occurs on the server, Oracle ILOM will automatically do the following:
■
■
■
Illuminate the Service Required status indicator (LED) on the server front and back panels.
Identify the faulted component in the Open Problems table.
Record system information about the faulted component or condition in the event log.
For further information about administering open problems that are detected and reported by
Oracle ILOM, refer to “Administering Open Problems” in the Oracle ILOM Administrator's
Guide for Configuration and Maintenance Firmware Release 3.2.x in the Oracle Integrated
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
293
Monitoring System Components
Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/
ILOM/docs.
Related Information
■
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at: http://www.
oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs
Monitoring System Components
The tables in this section identify the system components and describe the naming conventions
applied to the components of the Oracle Server X5-2L.
Each section corresponds to an IPMI entity ID and lists sensors, indicators, and fieldreplaceable units (FRUs) related to that entity. The tables contain the following fields:
■
■
■
■
Component Name – Shows the user-visible component name used in management
interfaces to refer to a specific sensor, indicator, or FRU. The IPMI name is a shortened
form of the component name, and is indicated by the boldface portion of the component
name.
IPMI Type – Indicates the type of sensor, indicator, or FRU represented.
Description – Describes the particular component name reference.
Values – Defines the states of the sensor, indicator, or FRU entity, and any specific units or
values that are expected, if applicable.
Note - Some component names are hidden in the Oracle ILOM user interfaces. These names
are marked as hidden in the tables. Further, as of Oracle ILOM 3.1, the Oracle ILOM 3.0 legacy
targets /SYS and /STORAGE have been replaced by /System. Even though these legacy targets
might be hidden, you can still use them to issue commands. For information on legacy targets,
see the ILOM 3.1 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
This section includes information for the following server components:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
294
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Monitoring System Components
System Chassis Components
The following table lists the system chassis components.
Component Name (Oracle
ILOM CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
/SYS
FRU
Product information only
/SYS/UUID
FRU
Unique system ID
Derived from host MAC address.
Used for PXE boot and licensing.
/SYS/ACPI
State sensor
Advanced Configuration and
Power Interface
(hidden)
01h-ACPI_ON_WORKING
20h-ACPI_SOFT_OFF
/SYS/VPS
Threshold
sensor
Virtual power sensor
Watts
/SYS/VPS_CPUS
Threshold
sensor
Virtual power sensor (CPUs)
Watts
/SYS/VPS_MEMORY
Threshold
sensor
Virtual power sensor (Memory)
Watts
/SYS/VPS_FANS
Threshold
sensor
Virtual power sensor (Fans)
Watts
/SYS/INTSW
Discrete
sensor
Chassis intrusion switch
01h-Deasserted
/SYS/T_AMB
Threshold
sensor
Ambient temperature on system
motherboard, located behind
the left side front SIS indicator.
Degrees Celsius
/SYS/TEMP_FAULT
Indicator
Temperature Fault LED
Color: Amber
02h-Asserted
Location: Front panel
Off: Normal
On: Chassis overtemp fault
/SYS/OK
Indicator
Power OK LED
Color: Green
Location: Front panel
Off: Power is off.
Standby blink: Standby power is on;
Oracle ILOM SP is running.
Slow blink: Startup sequence
initiated on host.
On: Host is booting OS or running
the OS.
/SYS/SERVICE
Indicator
Service Required LED
Color: Amber
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
295
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle
ILOM CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
Location: Front panel
Off: Normal
On: Server requires service.
/SYS/LOCATE
Indicator
Locator LED
Color: White
Location: Front and rear panels
Off: Normal
Fast blink: Locate function is
activated; self-extinguishes after 30
minutes.
/SYS/HOST_ERR
/SYS/PS_FAULT
Discrete
sensor
Host asserted error sensor
Indicator
Rear Power Supply Fault LED
01h-Deasserted
02h-Asserted
Color: Amber
Location: Mainboard
Off: Normal
On: General power supply fault
/SYS/FAN_FAULT
Indicator
Top Fan Fault LED
Color: Amber
Location: Mainboard
Off: Normal
On: General fan fault
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Cooling Unit Components
The system has 3.5-inch fan modules with two fans in each module. The following table lists
the system cooling unit components.
296
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle ILOM
CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]
FRU
Fan module FRU
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-x]
FRU
Individual fan
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
Fan module is present.
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-x]/TACH
Threshold
sensor
Fan module fan speed
RPM
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/SERVICE
Indicator
Fan Service Required LED
Color: Amber
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Location: Mainboard
Off: Normal
On: Fan module was
diagnosed as faulty.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Disk Backplane Components
The following table lists the disk backplane (DBP) components.
Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI
Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
/SYS/DBP
FRU
Disk backplane FRU
/SYS/DBP/SASEXP
FRU
SAS Expander FRU
/SYS/DBP/SASEXP/PRSNT
Discrete sensor
SAS Expander board
presence
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
SAS Expander
board temperature,
reported by
Expander CPLD
Degrees Celsius
/SYS/DBP/SASEXP/T_CORE
Threshold
sensor
Values (if applicable)
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
297
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI
Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]
Pseudo
Hard disk drives
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/PRSNT
Discrete sensor
Hard disk drive
presence
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
Hard disk drive state
02h-DRIVE_FAULT
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE
State sensor
Values (if applicable)
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
04h-PREDICTIVE_FAILURE
08h-HOT_SPARE
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/SERVICE
Indicator
Service Required
LED
Color: Amber
Location: Hard disk drive
(HDD)
Off: Normal
On: HDD was diagnosed as
faulty
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/OK2RM
Indicator
OK to remove
Color: Blue
Location: HDD drive
Off: Normal
On: OK to remove HDD
NVMe drives
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x]
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x]/PRSNT
Discrete sensor
NVMe device
presence
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Memory Device Components
The following table lists the memory device components.
298
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI
Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
FRU
Host CPU DIMM
FRU
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
Host CPU DIMM is
present.
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]/SERVICE
Indicator
Host CPU DIMM
Service Required
LED
Color: Amber
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Location: Mainboard
Off: Normal
On: DIMM was diagnosed as
faulty.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Power Unit Components
The following table lists the power unit components.
Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI
Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
/SYS/PS[0-1]
FRU
Power supply FRU
/SYS/PS[0-1]/PRSNT
Discrete sensor
Power supply is
present
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
Multistate, power
supply sensor type,
per IPMI
Presence detected
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Discrete sensor
Values (if applicable)
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Failure detected
Predictive failure
Power supply input lost
Power supply input lost or
out-of-range
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
299
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle ILOM CLI
Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
Power supply input out-ofrange
Configuration error
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Power sensor
Input power draw
Watts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
Power sensor
Output power
Watts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
Voltage sensor
Input voltage
Volts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Voltage sensor
12V output voltage
Volts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Voltage sensor
12V standby
output voltage
Volts
/SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT
Temperature sensor
Ambient
temperature
Degrees Celsius
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Processor Components
The following table lists the processor (CPU) components.
Component Name (Oracle
ILOM CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]
FRU
Host CPU FRU
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
Host CPU is present.
Indicator
Host CPU Service
Required LED
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/SERVICE
Values (if applicable)
01h-ENTITY_PRESENT
02h-ENTITY_ABSENT
Color: Amber
Location: Mainboard
Off: Normal
On: Processor was diagnosed as
faulty.
300
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle
ILOM CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
Static sensor
CPU DIMM bank
operating voltage
1.2V
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
System Board Components
The following table lists the system board components.
Component Name (Oracle ILOM
CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
/SYS/MB
FRU
General host system board
FRU
/SYS/MB/CPLD
FRU
Mainboard CPLD/FPGA
firmware version
/SYS/MB/NET[0-3]
FRU
Host Ethernet FRU
/SYS/MB/PCIE[1-6]
FRU
PCIe slot
/SYS/MB/PCIE[1-6]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
Option card inserted into PCIe
slot
/SYS/MB/PCIE3/PCIESW
FRU
PCIe switch for NVMe
support, optional, dedicated
slot
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE[0-2]
Threshold
sensor
Cooling zone chassis exhaust
temperature, located behind the
specified PCIe slots.
Values (if applicable)
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Degrees Celsius
■ Zone 0 – PCIe slot 5
■ Zone 1 – PCIe slot 4
■ Zone 2 – PCIe slot 1
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE[0-2]
Threshold
sensor
Cooling zone chassis inlet
temperature, located in front of
the specified PCIe slots.
Degrees Celsius
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
301
Monitoring System Components
Component Name (Oracle ILOM
CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
■ Zone 0 – PCIe slot 5
■ Zone 1 – PCIe slot 4
■ Zone 2 – PCIe slot 1
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01
Threshold
sensor
Gigabit Ethernet controller die
temperature
CPU 0, NET 0+1 Degrees
Celsius
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
Threshold
sensor
Gigabit Ethernet controller die
temperature
CPU 1, NET 2+3 Degrees
Celsius
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
Threshold
sensor
Power supply unit (PSU) inlet
temperature, located directly in
front of the PSU 0 air inlet.
Degrees Celsius
/SYS/SP
FRU
Service processor FRU
/SYS/SP/OK
Indicator
SP OK LED
Color: Green
Location: Front panel
On: SP is operating.
Off: SP requires service.
/SYS/SP/NET[0-1]
FRU
SP Ethernet FRU
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
System Firmware Components
The following table lists the system firmware components.
302
Component Name
(Oracle ILOM CLI Target)
IPMI Type
Description
/SYS/MB/BIOS
FRU
BIOS FRU
/SYS/MB/CPLD
FRU
Mainboard CPLD/FPGA firmware
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Monitoring System Components
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Hard Disk Drive Components
The following table lists the hard disk drive (HDD) components.
Component Name (Oracle ILOM
CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]
FRU
Rear hard disk drive FRU
From host
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
Rear hard disk drive presence
01h-ENTITY_PRESENT,
Indicator
Rear hard disk drive Service
Required LED
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/SERVICE
02h-ENTITY_ABSENT
Color: Amber
Location: Rear HDD
Off: Normal
On: Hard disk drive (HDD)
was diagnosed as faulty.
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/OK2RM
Indicator
Rear hard disk drive OK to
Remove LED
Color: Blue
Location: Rear HDD
Off: Normal
On: OK to remove
/SYS/MB/RHDD[0-1]/STATE
Discrete
sensor
Rear hard disk drive state
02h-DRIVE_FAULT
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]
FRU
Hard disk drive FRU
From host
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
Hard disk drive presence
01h-ENTITY_ABSENT
04hPREDICTIVE_FAILURE
08h-HOT_SPARE
02h-ENTITY_PRESENT
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
303
Identifying SNMP Trap Messages
Component Name (Oracle ILOM
CLI Targets)
IPMI Type
Description
Values (if applicable)
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE
Discrete
sensor
Writable multistate, slot/
connector sensor type, per
IPMI
02h-DRIVE_FAULT
Indicator
Hard disk drive Service
Required LED
04hPREDICTIVE_FAILURE
08h-HOT_SPARE
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/SERVICE
Color: Amber
Location: HDD
Off: Normal
On: Hard disk drive was
diagnosed as faulty.
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/OK2RM
Indicator
Hard disk drive OK to
Remove LED
Color: Blue
Location: HDD
Off: Normal
On: OK to remove
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x]
FRU
NVMe drive FRU
/SYS/DBP/NVME[0-x]/PRSNT
Discrete
sensor
PCIe NVMe drive
01h-ENTITY_PRESENT
02h-ENTITY_ABSENT
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“System Firmware Components” on page 302
Identifying SNMP Trap Messages
It is possible to configure Oracle ILOM to generate Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) traps when hardware problems occur. For information about how to configure SNMP
alert rule destinations to start receiving these traps, refer to the Oracle Integrated Lights Out
Manager (ILOM) 3.2 Documentation Library at http://www.oracle.com/goto/ILOM/docs.
The tables in these sections list the set of SNMP traps that are generated from Oracle ILOM.
304
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Environmental Events
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Environmental Events” on page 305
“Hard Disk Drive Events” on page 307
“Power Events” on page 307
“Fan Events” on page 311
“Memory Events” on page 312
“Entity Presence Events” on page 318
“Physical Security Events” on page 318
Environmental Events
The following table lists environmental events.
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0
Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0
Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0
Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
305
Environmental Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/PS[0-1]/T_OUT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE0
Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE0
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE1
/SYS/MB/T_IN_ZONE2
/SYS/MB/T_OUT_ZONE2
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdExceeded
/SYS/T_AMB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01
Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempFatalThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/T_AMB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01
Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
Severity and Description: Critical; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapTempCritThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET01
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/MB/T_CORE_NET23
Severity and Description: Informational; A temperature sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/MB/T_IN_PS
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
Related Information
■
■
306
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Hard Disk Drive Events
■
■
■
■
■
■
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Hard Disk Drive Events
The following table lists hard disk drive events.
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSlotOrConnectorError
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Assert
Severity and Description: Major: A sensor associated with a slot or connector has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSlotOrConnectorOk
/SYS/DBP/HDD[0-x]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Deassert
Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor associated with a slot or connector has returned
to its normal state.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Power Events
The following table lists power events.
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
307
Power Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PRESENCE ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PRESENCE DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_FAILURE ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_FAILURE DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PREDICTIVE_FAILURE ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_PREDICTIVE_FAILURE DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_LOST ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_LOST DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_ERROR ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_ERROR DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_RANGE_ERROR ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
308
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Power Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_INPUT_RANGE_ERROR DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_CONFIG_ERROR ASSERT
Severity and DescriptionMajor; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapPowerSupplyError
/SYS/PS[0-1]/STATE
Oracle ILOM Event Message: PS_CONFIG_ERROR DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has detected an error.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorNonCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/VPS
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded
Severity and Description: Minor; A sensor has reported that its value has gone above an upper
non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting. This generic 'sensor'
trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize the component type.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorThresholdOk
/SYS/VPS
Oracle ILOM Event Message:Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded
Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor has reported that its value is in the normal
operating range. This generic 'sensor' trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize
the component type.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorNonCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/VPS_FANS
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Severity and Description: Minor; A sensor has reported that its value has gone above an upper
non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting. This generic 'sensor'
trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize the component type.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorThresholdOk
/SYS/VPS_FANS
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor has reported that its value is in the normal
operating range. This generic 'sensor' trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize
the component type.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorFatalThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
Severity and Description: Critical; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
309
Power Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorFatalThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
Severity and Description: Informational; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
Severity and Description: Major; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has gone
above an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorCritThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_IN
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/P_OUT
Severity and Description: Informational; A power supply sensor has reported that its value has
gone below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageFatalThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Severity and Description: Critical; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone above
an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageFatalThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Severity and Description: Informational; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone
below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Severity and Description: Critical; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone above
an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
310
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
Fan Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageCritThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper critical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Severity and Description: Informational; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone
below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageNonCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Severity and Description: Minor; A voltage sensor has reported that its value has gone above an
upper non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapVoltageOk
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_12V_STBY
Severity and Description: Informational; A voltage sensor has reported that its value is in the
normal operating range.
/SYS/PS[0-1]/V_IN
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/V_DIMM
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Fan Events
The following table lists fan events.
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold exceeded
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
311
Memory Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
Severity and Description: Major; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone above
an upper critical threshold setting or below a lower critical threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedCritThresholdDeasserted
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower critical threshold no longer exceeded
Severity and Description: Informational; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone
below an upper critical threshold setting or above a lower critical threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedFatalThresholdExceeded
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold exceeded
Severity and Description: Critical; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone above
an upper fatal threshold setting or below a lower fatal threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapFanSpeedFatalThresholdDeasserted
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Lower fatal threshold no longer exceeded
Severity and Description: Informational; A fan speed sensor has reported that its value has gone
below an upper fatal threshold setting or above a lower fatal threshold setting.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower
threshold.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Memory Events
The following table lists memory events.
312
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
/SYS/MB/FM[0-3]/F[0-1]/TACH
Memory Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorNonCritThresholdExceeded
/SYS/VPS_CPUS
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold exceeded
/SYS/VPS_MEMORY
Severity and Description: Minor; A sensor has reported that its value has gone above an upper
non critical threshold setting or below a lower non critical threshold setting. This generic 'sensor'
trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize the component type.
The sunHwTrapThresholdType object indicates whether the threshold was an upper or lower.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSensorThresholdOk
/SYS/VPS_CPUS
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Upper noncritical threshold no longer exceeded
/SYS/VPS_MEMORY
Severity and Description: Informational; A sensor has reported that its value is in the normal
operating range. This generic 'sensor' trap is generated when the SNMP agent does not recognize
the component type.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.link_slow "The Quickpath
Interconnect (QPI) link is operating below normal speed."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.link_slow "The Quickpath
Interconnect (QPI) link is operating below normal speed."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.unknown-errcode "An unknown
error code from the Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) reference code has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.cpu.intel.quickpath.unknown-errcode "An unknown
error code from the Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) reference code has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.none "An invalid memory DIMM
configuration has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.none "An invalid memory DIMM
configuration has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
313
Memory Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.memtest-failed "All memory
channels have been disabled due to memory test failures."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.memtest-failed "All memory
channels have been disabled due to memory test failures."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.quadrank-3rd-slot "A quad-rank
memory DIMM has been installed in the third slot of a memory channel."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.quadrank-3rd-slot "A quad-rank
memory DIMM has been installed in the third slot of a memory channel."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.ddr3u-unsupported "An
unsupported DDR3 ultra low voltage memory DIMM has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.ddr3u-unsupported "An
unsupported DDR3 ultra low voltage memory DIMM has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.mrc.unknown-errcode "An unknown
error code from the Memory Reference Code (MRC) has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.mrc.unknown-errcode "An unknown
error code from the Memory Reference Code (MRC) has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.udimm-unsupported "An
unbuffered memory DIMM (UDIMM) has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
314
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Memory Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.udimm-unsupported "An
unbuffered memory DIMM (UDIMM) has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.sodimm-unsupported "An
unsupported SODIMM has been detected in system."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.sodimm-unsupported "An
unsupported SODIMM has been detected in system."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.4gb-fused "An unsupported 4-gb
memory DIMM has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.4gb-fused "An unsupported 4-gb
memory DIMM has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.8gb-fused "An unsupported 8-gb
memory DIMM has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.8gb-fused "An unsupported 8-gb
memory DIMM has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible "A memory DIMM
is incompatible with the memory controller."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible "A memory DIMM
is incompatible with the memory controller."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
315
Memory Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-maxranks "The
number of ranks allowed on a memory channel has been exceeded."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-maxranks "The
number of ranks allowed on a memory channel has been exceeded."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-quadrank "An
invalid quad-rank memory DIMM configuration has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.incompatible-quadrank "An
invalid quad-rank memory DIMM configuration has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.numranks-unsupported "A
memory DIMM with an unsupported number of ranks has been detected."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.numranks-unsupported "A
memory DIMM with an unsupported number of ranks has been detected."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.speed-slow "A memory DIMM
has been detected that is unable to run at speeds required by the platform."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.speed-slow "A memory DIMM
has been detected that is unable to run at speeds required by the platform."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.disable-quadrank "Memory
channel is populated with too many quad-rank memory DIMMs."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
316
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Memory Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.disable-quadrank "Memory
channel is populated with too many quad-rank memory DIMMs."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.population-invalid "Memory
DIMM is improperly populated or is a type that is not compatible with other DIMMs installed."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.population-invalid "Memory
DIMM is improperly populated or is a type that is not compatible with other DIMMs installed."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.out-of-order "The memory
DIMMs in a channel are not populated in sequential order."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.out-of-order "The memory
DIMMs in a channel are not populated in sequential order."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFault
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.category-unknown "Memory
DIMM is of an unknown type or category."
Severity and Description: Major; A memory component is suspected of causing a fault.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapMemoryFaultCleared
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/D[0-11]
Oracle ILOM Event Message: event fault.memory.intel.dimm.category-unknown "Memory
DIMM is of an unknown type or category."
Severity and Description: Informational; A memory component fault has been cleared.
Related Information
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
“System Chassis Components” on page 295
“Cooling Unit Components” on page 296
“Disk Backplane Components” on page 297
“Memory Device Components” on page 298
“Power Unit Components” on page 299
“Processor Components” on page 300
“System Board Components” on page 301
“Hard Disk Drive Components” on page 303
Monitoring Components and Identifying SNMP Messages
317
Entity Presence Events
Entity Presence Events
The following table lists entity presence events.
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorError
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_PRESENT ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has
detected an error. Device absent.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorOk
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_PRESENT
DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has
returned to its normal state. Device present.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorError
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_DISABLED ASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has
detected an error. Device disabled.
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapProcessorOk
/SYS/MB/P[0-x]/PRSNT
Oracle ILOM Event Message: ENTITY_DISABLED
DEASSERT
Severity and Description: Major; A processor sensor has
returned to its normal state. Device enabled.
Physical Security Events
Messages and Descriptions
Component Name
SNMP Trap: sunHwTrapSecurityIntrusion
/SYS/INTSW
Oracle ILOM Event Message: Assert
Severity and Description: Major; General Chassis intrusion
asserted.
318
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Index
A
activity indicator, 31
add-in cards
configuration utilities in Legacy BIOS Boot
Mode, 248
configuration utilities in UEFI BIOS Boot
Mode, 248
Advanced BIOS screen, 273
antistatic
mat, 52
measures
applying, 64
wrist strap, 52
antistatic measures
removing, 230
attaching devices to server, 41
B
battery
description, 21
installing, 128
removing, 126
bezel
controls, 14
BIOS
configuring serial port sharing, 44
Ethernet ports booting priority, 46
BIOS boot mode, switching between Legacy BIOS and
UEFI modes, 247
BIOS factory defaults, verifying, 250
BIOS Setup Utility
accessing, 243
Advanced screen, 273
boot mode, 246
Boot screen, 289
Exit screen, 290
exiting from, 266
function keys, 243
IO screen, 285
legacy boot mode, 246
Main screen, 269
menus, accessing, 243
navigating menu options, 245
service processor network settings, 259
setup screens summary, 242
shortcut key sequences, 243
TPM support, 256
UEFI boot mode, 246
UEFI-compliant, description, 246
board components, 295
boot device, selecting, 252
boot drive
LEDs, 32
boot mode
preserving settings when switching modes, 247
selecting, 251
buttons
Fault Remind, 134
Power, 57, 58, 233
C
cable part number
auxiliary signal cable, 151, 157, 161
DVD power and SATA data cable, 191
left LED indicator module cable, 197
NVMe cables, 178
power cable, 151, 157
power cable, center, 161
power cable, right, 161
rear storage drive power cable, 166
319
Index
right LED/USB indicator module cable, 205
SAS cables, 173
cables
connecting, 233
disconnecting, 60
cabling the server, 42
chassis components, 295
chassis serial number, locating, 49
components and nomenclature, 295
connecting devices to server, 41
connector locations, 41
controls, front panel, 14
cooling unit components, 296
crossover pinouts for SER MGT port, 238
D
default boot mode, 251
diagnosing
hardware faults, 29
DIMMs
description, 21
fault LEDs
inconsistencies with BIOS, 108
Fault Remind button, 108
identifying a faulty DIMM, 109
installing, 113
labels, 108
physical layout, 102
population example for optimal performance, 104
population rules, 104
rank classification labels, 108
removing, 109
supported configurations, 104
disk backplane components, 297
disk cage cover
installing, 229
removing, 67
disk components, 303
disk drive backplanes
description, 22
disk drives See drive
drive
hot-plugging, 72
identification, 73
latch release button, 75
320
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
DVD drive
description, 22
installing, 190
removing, 188
E
eight-drive storage drive backplane
installing, 149
removing, 146
electrostatic discharge
prevention, 64
safety precautions, 52
entity presence events, 318
environmental events, 305
Ethernet cables, connecting, 42
Ethernet ports
booting priority, 46, 46
device and driver naming, 46
pinout, 236
Exit BIOS screen, 290
exploded view of server, 19
external cables, connecting, 42
F
fan assembly door
installing, 228
removing, 65
fan events, 311
fan module
installing, 92
removing, 89
fan modules
description, 21
Fault Remind button
location, 108, 134
using, 108
firmware components, 295
function keys within BIOS Setup Utility, 243
G
Gigabit Ethernet ports, 235
Index
pinout, 236
H
hard disk drive components, 303
hard disk drive events, 307
hard drives See drive
hardware faults
diagnosing, 29
HDD drive
installing, 78
removing, 73
hot-plugging drives, 72
I
illustrated parts breakdown, 19
installing
battery, 128
DIMMs, 113
disk cage cover, 229
DVD drive, 190
eight-drive storage drive backplane, 149
fan assembly door, 228
fan module, 92
HDD drive, 78
LED indicator module (left), 197
LED/USB indicator module (right), 205
motherboard assembly, 219
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
card, 184
PCIe cards, 119
power supply, 97
processors, 140
rear storage drive, 88
rear-mounted storage drive backplane, 165
server into rack, 230
server top cover, 226
SSD drive, 78
twelve-drive storage drive backplane, 155
twenty-four drive storage drive backplane, 160
USB flash drive, 124
IO allocation
enabling and disabling resources, 265
IO BIOS screen, 285
IP address, setting, 259
IPMI type, 294
L
latch release button, drive, 75
LED indicator module (left)
installing, 197
removing, 193
LED/USB indicator module (right)
installing, 205
removing, 201
LED/USB indicator modules
description, 22
replacing, 193
LEDs
boot drive, 32
power supply, 33, 94, 95
storage drive, 32
system status, 31
Legacy BIOS Boot Mode
selecting, 246
switching between UEFI Boot Mode, 247
locating chassis serial number, 49
Locator LED button, 31
M
Main BIOS screen, 269
memory device components, 298
memory events, 312
menus, BIOS Setup Utility, 243
motherboard assembly
description, 22
installing, 219
LED/USB cables, 211
removing, 209
replacing, 209
N
NET MGT port
pinout, 33, 236, 237
network settings, service processor, 259
Network Time Protocol (NTP), 128
NVMe cables
description, 22
321
Index
replacing, 174
O
operating system
supported by UEFI BIOS, 246
Option ROMs
enabling and disabling, 262
legacy BIOS allocation, 249
minimizing resource exhaustion, 249
Oracle Integrated Lights Out Manager (Oracle ILOM)
key identity properties (KIP) for FRUID autoupdate feature, 53
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA card
installing, 184
removing, 180
replacing, 180
P
PCIe cards
description, 21
installing, 119
removing, 117
replacing, 115
slot characteristics, 116
PCIe slot numbering, 116
physical security events, 318
pinout
Ethernet ports, 236
Gigabit Ethernet ports, 236
network management port, 237
RJ-45 to DB-25 crossover pinout, 238
serial management port, 238
USB port, 240
video connector, 239
ports
Ethernet, 235
Gigabit Ethernet, 235
network management (NET MGT), 33, 236
serial management (SER MGT), 237
USB, 240
video, 239
power
button, 57, 58, 233
server on, 233
322
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
standby power mode, 60
power down server
emergency, 58
gracefully, 55
with Power button, 57
power events, 307
power supplies
description, 21
power supply
installing, 97
LEDs, 33, 94, 95
removing, 94
power unit components, 299
power-on self-test (POST) code checkpoint tests, 31
Power/OK indicator, 31
processor components, 300
processor removal and replacement tool, 130
processor socket cover
installing, 209
removing, 209
processor(s)
physical layout, 102
processors
description, 22
identifying faulty processor, 134
installing, 140
maximum DIMMs supported, 104
removal and replacement tool, 130
removing, 134
replacing, 129
PSU See power supply
R
rear storage drive
installing, 88
removing, 86
rear-mounted storage drive backplane
installing, 165
removing, 162
removing
antistatic measures, 230
battery, 126
DIMMs, 109
disk cage cover, 67
DVD drive, 188
Index
eight-drive storage drive backplane, 146
fan assembly door, 65
fan module, 89
HDD drive, 73
LED indicator module (left), 193
LED/USB indicator module (right), 201
motherboard assembly, 209
Oracle Storage 12 Gb/s SAS PCIe RAID HBA
card, 180
PCIe cards , 117
power supply, 94
processors, 134
rear storage drive, 86
rear-mounted storage drive backplane, 162
server top cover, 64
SSD drive, 73
twelve-drive storage drive backplane, 152
twenty-four drive storage drive backplane, 158
USB flash drive, 122
replacing
battery, 126
DIMMs, 101
fan module, 89
LED/USB indicator modules, 193
motherboard assembly, 209
NVMe cables, 174
power supply, 93
processors, 129
SAS cables, 167
server top cover, 226
storage drive backplanes, 146
S
safety
ESD precautions, 52
precautions, 51
symbols, 52
SAS cables
description, 22
replacing, 167
screens, BIOS Setup Utility, 242, 243
serial management (SER MGT) port
pinout, 238
RJ-45 to DB-9 crossover pinout, 238
serial number, locating, 49
serial port sharing, configuring, 44
server
diagnosing, 29
installing into rack, 230
returning server to operation, 225
troubleshooting, 25
server top cover
installing, 226
removing, 64
server troubleshooting, information needed when
contacting support, 48
server, power on, 244
service
preparing server, 54
service processor
network settings, configuring, 259
Service Required LED, 31
set command, 145
shortcut key sequences in BIOS Setup Utility, 243
show command, 145
shutting down the system
gracefully, using Oracle ILOM CLI, 55
gracefully, using Oracle ILOM web interface, 56
gracefully, using the Power button, 57
immediately, using Oracle ILOM CLI, 59
immediately, using Oracle ILOM web interface, 59
immediately, using the Power button, 58
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Traps
generated by system, 304
SSD drive
installing, 78
removing, 73
standby power, 58, 59, 60, 60
start command, 233
stop command, 56
storage drive
LEDs, 32
storage drive backplanes
replacing, 146
storage drives
description, 21
support for product, 48
system board components, 301
system chassis components, 295
system components and nomenclature, 294
system firmware components, 302
323
Index
T
technical support, 48
tools required for service, 54
troubleshooting
information needed when contacting support, 48
overview, 39
server, 25
Trusted Platform Module (TPM), configuring support
for, 256
twelve-drive storage drive backplane
installing, 155
removing, 152
twenty-four drive storage drive backplane
installing, 160
removing, 158
U
UEFI boot mode
advantages of using, 247
selecting, 246
supported operating systems, 246
UEFI-compliant BIOS, description, 246
USB flash drive
installing, 124
removing, 122
USB port
pinout, 240
V
video port
pinout, 239
W
weight of server, 63
324
Oracle Server X5-2L Service Manual • May 2015
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement